JP2016123462A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of favorably improving an attention degree to a game.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 acquires reservation information for special symbols on the basis of entry of a game ball in an upper actuation hole or a lower actuation hole, and executes win/loss determination on the basis of the reservation information. When it turns out a jackpot result in the win/loss determination, the game state is transferred to an opening/closing execution mode. Further, when a game ball enters a through-gate, the game machine acquires reservation information for normal symbols and executes win/loss determination on the basis of the reservation information. When it turns out an opening result in the win/loss determination, the game is transferred to a support state where an electric generator provided at the lower actuation hole becomes an open state. A standby period before or after the support state is so set as to be a different period according to a game state in the special symbol side.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area Done. In addition, for example, in a display device provided in a gaming machine, a display effect for one game time is displayed in which a variable display of a pattern is started and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed at the final stop display of the variable display. Is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in gaming machines, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to games, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The invention described in claim 1
Game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first pitching portion provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a gaming ball;
First determination means for performing a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first entrance part;
With
In the gaming state, at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are set,
A gaming machine comprising gaming state transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means being the first correspondence result. In
A second entrance part that is provided separately from the first entrance part in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
An accepting state that is provided in the game area and that is easy to accept a game ball into the first entrance part or a predetermined entrance part, and a non-acceptance state that is less likely to accept the game ball into the first entrance part than the acceptance state. Variable receiving means displaceable to
A second determination means for performing a second determination based on a game ball entering the second pitching section;
Variable control execution means for executing unit variable acceptance control for changing the variable acceptance means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changing to the non-acceptance state;
An acceptance state transition means for transitioning to a special state in which the unit variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on a result of the second determination by the second determination means being a second correspondence result;
In the special state, an effect executing means for executing a standby effect in a standby period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed,
First period setting means for setting the waiting period as a first period according to the gaming state;
A second period setting means for setting the waiting period as a second period, which is a period different from the first period, according to the gaming state;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to a game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a general game game control process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between a usual figure game time and a support state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between each opening result, the opening-and-closing mode, the length of each waiting time, and its production. It is a flowchart which shows the start process of a support state. It is a flowchart which shows the completion process of a support state. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure for performing various effects. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the storage area for suspension. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of the fluctuation display of special figure game times. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area | region inside a frame of a display screen, and an area | region outside a frame. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a re-change effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a special figure reservation notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of the re-change effect in the special figure reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the change display control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for jackpots. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between a stop line and address information. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for reach generation. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between a stop line and a stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the production | generation setting process for normal removal. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation use process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special figure change completion. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for special figure reservation in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a special figure pending | holding command. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure reservation control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure reservation advance notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the notification setting process for detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for special figure reservation notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between a stop line and a stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the process for replacement. It is a flowchart which shows a stop result correction process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st correction process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for correction. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd correction process. It is a flowchart which shows a 3rd correction process. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure change display control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a common figure game round, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for a common figure fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for support states in MPU of an effect control apparatus. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the process for a common figure hold in MPU of a main controller, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a common figure hold command. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the common figure reservation control process in MPU of an effect control apparatus, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline | summary of a general figure reservation notice. (A) It is a flowchart which shows a common figure reservation notice setting process, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the selection table of the image for a hold | maintenance. It is a flowchart which shows the situation grasp processing on the special figure side. It is a flowchart which shows a timing change process. It is a flowchart which shows the situation grasp process by the side of a special figure in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the situation grasp process by the side of a special figure in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure holding | maintenance control process in MPU of the production control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special drawing production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the overlapping relationship of a support state and opening / closing execution mode. In the fifth embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing processing for changing ordinary maps, (b) is a flowchart showing processing for changing pending commands, and (c), (d) for explaining special effects. It is explanatory drawing of. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of the waiting time in a support state.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port (non-priority entering ball portion) 33, a lower operating port (priority entering ball portion) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, and a main display unit. 43, the display part 44 for an accessory, etc. are each provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 34 with respect to the upper working port 33, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 34 larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 33. On the contrary, from the viewpoint that the advantage of the support state described later is not excessively increased, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the upper operation port 33 to be larger than the number of payouts related to the lower operation port 34. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to each operating port 33, 34, it is preferable to set the payout number related to the variable winning device 32 larger than the payout number related to each operating port 33, 34.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PE can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area than the variable display unit 36 that is continuous below the upper area PE1. The left region PE2 that is the left region, the right region PE3 that is continuous to the lower side of the upper region PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, the left region PE2, and the right region PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower region PE4 which is continuous below and below the variable display unit 36.

  When the player operates the firing handle 54 with a first range of rotation amount that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball flows down to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. Start out. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PE1, the left area PE2, and the lower area PE4. On the other hand, when the player operates the launch handle 54 with a second range of turn amount that is equal to or greater than the reference turn amount as the second launch operation, the game is performed to the right of the lateral region in the upper region PE1. The ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PE1, the right area PE3, and the lower area PE4. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PE2 of the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 by adjusting the amount of rotation of the launch handle 54, and the right area PE3. The game can be played so that the game ball flows down.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the lower region PE4 of the game board 24. That is, the game ball can reach the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 regardless of whether the player is performing the first launch operation or the second launch operation. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric accessory 34a will be described. The electric accessory 34a includes a closed state (non-accepted state, non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the game ball is difficult to win in the lower operating port 34, and an open state (accepted state, in which the game ball is easier to win than in the closed state). (Support state or guide state).

  The operating port case constituting the upper operating port 33 projects to the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case (that is, the left and right width of the upper operating port 33) is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is left and right when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is larger than the distance between the electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, the installation interval between both the operating ports 33 and 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 34, and the electric operation item 34a is opened, so that the lower operation port 34 can be won. In particular, at this time, in the middle of the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above. Until the object 34a is fully opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side of the operating port case and is bounced outward, and does not win the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower working port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower working port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  In addition to the configuration in which the operation port case of the upper operation port 33 is substantially trapezoidal as described above, the operation port case of the upper operation port 33 has a two-stage configuration having a narrow upper width and a lower width, A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on each of the left and right sides, or an obstruction nail may be implanted obliquely below the operating port case.

  The variable winning device 32 is installed in the lower area PE4 in the game board 24. That is, the game ball can reach the variable winning device 32 regardless of whether the player is performing the first launch operation or the second launch operation. The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a big win or a special off-winning win is made. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  Two through gates 35 are provided in the left area PE2 and the right area PE3 of the game board 24 with the variable display unit 36 interposed therebetween. That is, when the player is performing the first launch operation, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 on the side provided in the left region PE2, and the player performs the second launch operation. If it is, the game ball can reach the through gate 35 on the side provided in the right region PE3. Both through gates 35 are configured such that game balls can pass through, and the game balls won in the through gate 35 in the game area PE are discharged to the game area PE as they are. The game ball that has won (passed) the through gate 35 then flows down to the lower region PE4. That is, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the upper working port 33, the lower working port 34, and the variable winning device 32.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. In addition, on the upper surface of the decoration member 39, a part of the plurality of general winning ports 31 described above is installed in a state of being opened upward.

  In the main display section 43, when the variable winning device 32 enters the opening / closing execution mode (or when the opening / closing execution mode is set) by winning the big win, the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. The round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times of opening, the first result display part AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating opening 33, and the lower operating opening 34 A second result display section BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning.

  In the round display section RS, the display of the number of times of opening is started at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the first result display section AS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the upper working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display section BS, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning to the lower operation port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS, BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 is won, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

  The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 displays a variation of the picture triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Here, based on the winning to the through gate 35, the display of variation is started in the display portion 44 for an accessory, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above-mentioned variation display is stopped. This is equivalent to one game in the game. Hereinafter, in order to distinguish from the game times in the result display units AS and BS, the game times in the accessory display unit 44 are also referred to as general game times, and the games in the main display unit 43 (result display units AS and BS). The times are also called special game times.

  The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device are used. Also good.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In the symbol display device 41, not only the variation display of the special figure game times corresponding to the result display portions AS and BS, but also the variation display of the general game times corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is performed. The position and size of the variable display area on the display screen, the variable pattern, etc. are set differently for the special figure game times and the general figure game times. It is possible to visually distinguish the fluctuation display of each time. The areas where special figure game times and ordinary figure game times are performed will be described in detail later.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a first reserved light emitting unit 45 corresponding to the first result display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operating port 33 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the first holding light emitting unit 45 is turned on. A second reserved light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper right part on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the lower operation port 34 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by turning on the second on-hold light emitting unit 46. As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first reserved light emitting unit 45 and the second reserved light emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  A third reserved light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided below the center frame 42. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding light emitting unit 47.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window 61 as a part of the various light emitting units. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 is housed and configured.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81 and the production control device 82 from the rear. ing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. When changing state such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for signal output (or during the transition to the state). And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entering portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, and the like. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and also performs support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  The effect control device 82 includes a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, an ending command, and other special command effect commands related to special figure game times, a change command related to ordinary game times, and a type command. Various production commands such as a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display unit. 43 and the display part 44 for an accessory are connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each special figure game round, the display control of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the main display section 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main winning operation in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is executed. Display control of the round display part RS in the display part 43 is executed. In the ordinary game game, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MOU 202, and the support state is displayed in the accessory display unit 44 in the support state in which the electric accessory 34a is won. Display control indicating winning is executed.

  Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202, and through this external output terminal 99, information on entrance to the various entrances and jackpots to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side. The information regarding the lottery result such as is output. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the state and the like of the pachinko machine 10 by the hall computer HC.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied. The power source and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The production control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and each of the on-hold light emitting units 45 to 47 provided on the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and speaker unit provided on the front door frame 14. In addition to driving and controlling 64, the display control device 212 is controlled.

  In the display control device 212, display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the command input from the effect control device 82. In this case, in the production control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the symbol display time on the symbol display device 41 and finally the combination type of symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined. The lottery of the presence / absence of reach and the contents of reach production is executed.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, there are three symbols of upper, middle, and lower tiers in the approximate center of the display screen G as a variable display area of special figure game times. Columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, when an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later is obtained, the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state in which a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and then an explicit moving image is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and thereafter , The common video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. Can be appropriately changed.

  A first hold display area Ga corresponding to the first hold light emitting unit 45 is set on the left side in the lower part of the display screen G, and a second hold light emitting part 46 is set on the right side in the lower part of the display screen G. A second hold display area Gb is set.

  In the first holding display area (non-priority side holding display area) Ga, the unit holding display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33 is four, and the first reserved display area Ga corresponding to this is the first unit reserved display area Ga1, second A unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball is displayed in the upper operation port 33. When the number of holds when winning is 4, the predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4.

  In the second hold display area (priority hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. The section is displayed as shown. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the lower operating hole 34 is four, and the second reserved display area Gb is associated with the first unit reserved display area Gb1, second A unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

  For example, if the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 1, the hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. In the case where the number of holds is 4, the hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Gb1 to the fourth unit hold display area Gb4.

  In the display screen G, the above-described symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the holding display areas Ga and Gb are not overlapped with each other, more specifically, the upper part of the display screen G is a general-purpose display area as a variable-display display area. P is set. The general map display area P is composed of a plurality of (two) display units, and variable display is possible by switching display colors in each of these display units. Further, the general symbol display area P is smaller than the variable display area in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and each display portion in the general symbol display area P is smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

  The general-purpose display area P corresponds to the accessory display section 44, and when the variable display is performed on the accessory display section 44, the variable display is also performed on the general-purpose display area P. Then, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 together with the accessory display unit 44.

  On the right side of the upper part of the display screen G (more specifically, the right side of the general map display area P), a third hold display area Gc corresponding to the third hold light emitting unit 47 is set.

  The third hold display area Gc is partitioned and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Gc1 to Gc4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the through gate 35 are juxtaposed in the left-right direction. Specifically, when the game ball wins the through gate 35, the maximum number of reservations is four, and the third unit display area Gc is associated with the first unit display unit Gc1, the second unit corresponding to this. A hold display area Gc2, a third unit hold display area Gc3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gc4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball wins the through gate 35 is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Gc1, and the game ball wins the through gate 35. In the case where the number of holdings is four in this case, a predetermined holding image is displayed in all of the first unit holding display area Gc1 to the fourth unit holding display area Gc4.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a first result display unit AS of the main display unit 43 The first variation type for determining the variation display time of the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 and the second result display unit BS It is set to be used and the counter CS1. Further, when determining the open random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric combination open state, and the open type in which the open pattern of the electric combination 34a is set. The open type counter C5 to be used, the accessory display unit 44, and the second variation type counter CS2 for determining the variation display time of the accessory display unit 44 in the symbol display device 41 are used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, C4 to C5, and CS2 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 in the lottery counter buffer 231 is awarded to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 The stored information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as the acquired information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first result display section and a holding area Rb for the second result display section, and a first execution area AE1. The reserved areas Ra and Rb respectively include a first area Ra1 and Rb1, a second area Ra2 and Rb2, a third area Ra3 and Rb3, and a fourth area Ra4 and Rb4. In accordance with the winning history, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is any of the hold information. Stored in the area. Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area Ra1, Rb1 to the fourth area Ra4, Rb4, when the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first areas Ra1, Rb1 → first Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 2 area Ra2, Rb2 → third area Ra3, Rb3 → fourth area Ra4, Rb4. By providing four areas in this way, a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are held and stored. The reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area, and the total number-of-holds storage area is used to specify the number in which the winning history for the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored. To store information.

  The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the holding areas Ra and Rb when the variable display on the main display unit 43 is started. At the start of the figure game times, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the special table success / failure table includes a special map success / failure table for low probability mode (a low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 8 (a) and a high probability in FIG. 8 (b). A special figure success / failure table for mode (high probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the special drawing lottery, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), the value of the random number for winning the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Moreover, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is an outlier result except for the random number value that is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, two types of special outlook results and normal outlook results are set as outlier results. Has been. These differences will be described later.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 29) and then returns to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  Here, as an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes relatively high. As described above, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed 15 times (the number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 32a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is set so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 32a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 increases from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to when it ends, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 32a are not as described above, in the low-frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 is not substantially generated.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support state (electric role open state) in the electric component open lottery using the open random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 1 / 2) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. The opening time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been. In addition, the difference in the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a when the support state is won by the level of the support mode will be described in detail later.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. Further, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode may be set by changing any one condition or any combination of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability.

  The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit in FIG. 9A and a second result display unit in FIG. 9B. A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 9A, as the distribution destination of the game result, the normal jackpot result (low-probability corresponding special game result), the unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result (non- Explicit high-probability corresponding game result or latent probability variation state), explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability corresponding game result or sudden probability variation result), 15R probability variation jackpot result (high probability special game result) Has been.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of special figure games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. is there. In other words, the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (non-explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” is unspecified. It corresponds to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, “15 to 19” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and “20 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result are set as the probability variation jackpot result, thereby diversifying the mode of the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when the three types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the second highest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency support mode, and the support mode is the low-frequency winning mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2R probability variation jackpot result is lowest. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In particular, in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, but the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as in the normal gaming state. Then, as a gaming state, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a high probability mode even though the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is common to the low frequency support mode. It is possible to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 9B, only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the game result distribution destination. Of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game result distribution mode in the case of winning the jackpot is based on the winning win based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the winning to the lower operating port 34. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on.

  Here, regardless of whether the distribution table for the first result display section or the distribution table for the second result display section is used, the probability of a promiscuous jackpot result when the jackpot is won is the same. Yes. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. ing. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display section, the number of values of the big hit type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation big hit result is 20. Therefore, the probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is determined based on whether or not a big win is won based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and a big winning win based on the winning to the lower working port 34. (Specifically, 2/3).

  However, if a big win is won based on the winning of the lower working port 34 and a probable big hit result is generated, a 15R probable big winning result is always obtained, whereas a big win is won based on the winning of the upper working port 33 and In the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probable jackpot result or an explicit 2R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/4, and a 15R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/2. In other words, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot win is won based on the winning to the lower operation port 34. It will be higher than if you win a jackpot based on winning.

  In addition, in the unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result, the winning / raft lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends as described above, but the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. When compared with the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the opportunity to receive game balls is reduced by the fact that the electric accessory 34a is less likely to be in the open state, and further, based on the distribution table for the second result display section. The possibility that a lottery will be performed is reduced.

  As described above, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 have a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays a game while expecting that a prize will be generated in the lower working port 34 among the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and accordingly, the frequency of winning in the lower working port 34. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases becomes higher.

  Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, when a result of losing is determined in the lottery, a result of normal losing or a special losing result is obtained. In this case, in the case of a normal losing result that occurs with a relatively high probability when the result is a losing result, the open / close execution mode is not shifted, and further, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

  On the other hand, a special failure result that occurs with a relatively low probability when a failure result is obtained results in a special failure state. In the special losing state, the open / close execution mode is entered in a situation where the result of losing is determined in the lottery. However, the opening / closing execution mode of the transfer destination is the low-frequency winning mode. Therefore, even if the result is a special losing result, it is not possible to expect a game ball to be awarded to the big prize opening 32a. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode do not shift.

  By setting the special loss result as described above, the opening of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 can be used as an effect. Here, not in the opening / closing execution mode, but also in the normal gaming state where the winning / raising lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, if the result is a special outage result, the low frequency winning mode is executed. Only the mode is changed, and thereafter, the normal gaming state is restored. On the other hand, when the above-described implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode, and thereafter, the winning / raising lottery mode is high although the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Probability mode. As a result, the occurrence of a special outage result under normal gaming conditions and the occurrence of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result will result in a transition to the opening / closing execution mode as the same low-frequency winning mode, and then the support mode becomes low-frequency support. In both cases, the difference between the two is that the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode in the former, whereas the high probability mode is in the latter. In other words, the occurrence of a special loss result under normal gaming conditions and the occurrence of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are common to the behavior of each movable object such as the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34. However, only the internal lottery state is different. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode occurs under the normal gaming state, it is possible to imagine whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode afterwards. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

  When the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 8A, the number of random numbers resulting in the special loss result is two, as is the case with the random number winning the big hit. On the other hand, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the random number value resulting in the special losing result is the special number in the low probability mode. It is one smaller than the number of random number values that will be the result of divergence. In this way, by reducing the number of random values that result in special outliers to be less than the number of random number values that are won in big hits in the high probability mode, the jackpot is greater than the probability that results in special outage in the high probability mode. The probability of winning can be increased. In addition, by setting the number of random numbers resulting in special outliers to be lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a special outage result in the high probability mode is lower than in the low probability mode. Can also be lowered.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the special game game transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the special figure game times, the stop display result after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started in the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display becomes the special display result. This is a display state for making the player think that the change display state is likely to be the special display result before being derived and displayed.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the display of symbol variation, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents of FIG. 6 will be specifically described. First, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed. Thereafter, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Thereafter, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. When the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The first variation type counter CS1 determines in the MPU 202 the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. Used in The first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The first variation type counter CS <b> 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  In the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the open random number counter C4, the open type counter C5, and the second variation type counter CS2 is used as an acquisition information storage means on the normal map side when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. Are stored in the electronic role holding area 233.

  The electric role holding area 233 includes an electric role holding area Rc and a second execution area AE2 for usual use. The holding area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 in accordance with a winning history to the through gate 35. Each numerical value information of the open random number counter C4, the open type counter C5, and the second variation type counter CS2 is stored in any area as the hold information.

  In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, the first area Rc1 → the second area Rc2 → the third area Rc3 → the fourth area when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs a plurality of times continuously. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of Rc4. Since each of the four areas is provided in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the through gate 35 are stored on hold.

  The second execution area AE2 for usual use is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the holding area Rc when starting the variable display of the accessory display unit 44. At the start of the ordinary game game, the release determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

  For details of each counter on the normal side, the open random number counter C4 is, for example, sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric role reservation area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a normal lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored open random number counter C4.

  The random number value that is won in the support status in the general drawing lottery is stored in the validity table storage area 221 as the validity information group storage means in the ROM 203 as a common-use success / failure table. As already explained, in the common drawing lottery, the probability of becoming a support state (probability of winning the support state) is the same regardless of the level of the support mode, and the universal figure success / failure table stored in the ROM 203 is also the same. A common table is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8C, if the open random number counter C4 = 0 to 99 in the common use acceptance table, the electric accessory 34a is shifted to a support state for controlling the open state, and C4 = 100. If it is -199, it sets so that it may not be made to shift to a support state, without controlling the electric accessory 34a to an open state.

  Here, as a mode of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a in the support state, the occurrence frequency of winning in the electric accessory 34a from the start to the end of the support state is relatively high. A high winning support state and a low winning support state are set. Specifically, in the high winning support state, the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is performed three times (the number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the support state, and one opening is 3 sec (high frequency time). Or until the number of winnings in the electric accessory 34a (lower operating port 34) reaches 6 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening and closing of the electric accessory 34a is performed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the support state, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). This is continued until the time has elapsed or until the number of winnings in the electric accessory 34a (lower operating port 34) reaches three (the number of low frequency).

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 53 so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening time of one electric accessory 34a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the support state related to the low winning support state, the game ball is not substantially won.

  It should be noted that the number of opening / closing times of the electric accessory 34a in the high winning support state and the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high winning support state. As long as the frequency of winning a prize to the lower operating port 34 between the start and end of the support state increases, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high winning support state has more opening / closing times than the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-winning support state and the low-winning support state, in the support state related to the low-winning support state, a configuration in which a winning to the lower operation port 34 does not substantially occur. It is good to do. For example, in the high winning support state, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low winning support state, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game ball and the opening time of the first lower operation port 34 are not as described above, in the low winning support state, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the lower working port 34 does not occur substantially.

  The game result distribution destination for the open type counter C5 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table for ordinary maps will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the distribution table for ordinary maps includes a distribution table for ordinary maps in the low frequency support mode in FIG. 10A and a common distribution table in the high frequency support mode in FIG. A chart distribution table is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), the first opening result A (first support result), the second as the allocation destination for the general drawing winning in any of the general mapping allocation tables. The release result B (second support result) and the third release result C (third support result) are set. Each of the opening results A to C is a distribution result in which the first opening result A is in the low winning support state, and the second opening result B and the third opening result C are distribution results in the high winning support state. . And, in the distribution table for general maps in the low frequency support mode and the distribution table for general maps in the high frequency support mode, the distribution table for general maps in the high frequency support mode is in the higher winning support state. The distribution result (second release result B and third release result C) is easily distributed (2/3 is allocated to the high winning support state), and the distribution table for normal maps in the low frequency support mode is better. It is easy to be distributed to the distribution result (first release result A) in the low winning support state (2/3 is distributed to the low winning support state).

  Here, in detail for each of the opening results A to C, the contents of the effects performed by the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 which are the control devices on the sub-side differ from each of the opening results A to C. Multiple types of release results are set for each. That is, the first release result A1, A2, and A3 are set as subordinate groups in the first release result A group, and the second release result B1 is set as the subordinate group in the second release result B group. , B2, and B3 are set, and the third release result C1, C2, and C3 are set as the lower group of the third release result C group. In each of the opening results A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 to C3, although the opening mode of the electric accessory 34a is the same as the opening mode of the upper group, the production contents on the sub side are different. That is, the first release results A1 to A3 are all in an open mode in which the low winning support state is achieved, but the contents of the effects are different. In addition, although the second release results B1 to B3 and the third release results C1 to C3 are all in an open mode in which a high winning support state is achieved, the contents of the effects are different.

  In the common allocation table, the value of the release type counter C5 is associated with each release result A to C of the upper group on a one-to-one basis, and each release result A1 to A3, B1 to B1 of the lower group is assigned. B3 and C1 to C3 are also associated one-to-one. Therefore, on the main control device 81 side, it is possible to grasp the opening mode of the electric accessory 34a as information on each opening result A to C of the upper group, and it is also possible to grasp the contents of the effect. Differences in the contents of the production will be described in detail later.

  As already described, the MPU 202 determines the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS using the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the first execution area AE1. However, for the determination, the special display variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is used. In addition, the MPU 202 determines stop results in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1. However, for the determination, the special figure stop result table in the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used.

  Further, the MPU 202 determines the change display time in the accessory display unit 44 using the value of the second change type counter CS2 stored in the second execution area AE2. The fluctuation display time table for general maps in the display time table storage area 223 is used. The MPU 202 determines the stop result in the accessory display unit 44 using the value of the open random number counter C4 and the value of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2. The stop result table for ordinary use in the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main controller 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, when it is determined that a ball has entered the upper working port 33, a winning detection flag for the upper working port is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and a ball enters the lower working port 34. If it is determined that the winning action has been made, a winning detection flag for the lower working port is stored in the various flag storage area 235. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35, a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4 and the open type counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the open random number counter C4, and the open type counter C5 are each incremented by 1 and each of them reaches 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. clear. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 35 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S105, where a winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed, and this timer interrupt process is terminated. The through winning process and the winning opening process will be described in detail below.

<Winning winning process>
First, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won (entered) the through gate 35 by confirming whether a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If the game ball has not won the through gate 35, the winning process is terminated. If the through gate 35 has been won, an external signal setting process is performed in step S202 in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S203, a value stored in the number-of-holds storage area for storing the number of hold information in the reserved role area Rc is read, and the number of hold information stored in the reserved role area Rc is shown. It is determined whether the reserved storage number FN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the usual figure reserved memory number FN is the upper limit value, the main winning process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the ordinary figure reserved memory number FN is incremented by 1 in step S204. Then, in step S205, a process for storing each value of the open random number counter C4, the open type counter C5, and the second variation type counter CS2 is performed. The main winning process is terminated. The processing for holding a general map is made by recognizing that a general winning prize has occurred by transmitting a general map holding command to the presentation control device 82 and the display control device 212 which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), and will be described later. This is a process for executing a general figure hold notice.

  The usual figure hold command set in step S206 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in an external output process (step S501) of a normal process, which will be described later. Is received, the processing for changing the display in the third hold light emitting unit 47 and the general drawing hold display area Gc in accordance with the increase in the number of hold is executed.

  Specifically, the production control device 82 performs control so that each light emitting unit in the third reserved light emitting unit 47 emits light in the number corresponding to the usual figure storage number FN. In addition, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 to execute a process for displaying a reserved image for a general map in the general map hold display area Gc. In the general map hold display area Gc, the hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the general map hold storage number FN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Gc1 at the left end. If the usual reserved storage number FN is 4, the reserved images are displayed in all the reserved display areas Gc1 to Gc4. A detailed description of the process in step S206 will be described later.

<Winning process for working port>
Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the winning process for the operation port will be described.

  In step S301, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning prize) in the upper working port 33 is confirmed by checking whether a winning detection flag for the upper working port 33 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. judge. If it is determined that the game ball has won the upper working port 33, in step S302, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set. In the subsequent step S303, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the upper working port 33. In step S304, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Thereafter, in step S305, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 33, in step S306, whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) in the lower working port 34 is determined in various flag storage areas of the RAM 204. The determination is made by checking whether or not the winning detection flag for the lower operation port 34 is stored in 235. If it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operating port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set in step S307. In the subsequent step S308, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34. In step S309, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the start-up storage number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S305, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S301 and step S306 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

  The prize ball command set in steps S302 and S307 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in an external output process of a normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S305 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the information acquisition process, first, in step S401, the start reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) N (RaN or RbN) set in step S304 or step S309 described above is the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). It is judged whether it is less than. If the start pending storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the corresponding start display storage number N of the corresponding result display area holding area is set in step S402. In addition to incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total pending count storage area in step S403 (hereinafter referred to as the common pending count CRN) is incremented by 1.

  In the subsequent step S404, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 are stored in the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S402.

  That is, when the first start hold memory number RaN for the upper working port is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 are The first storage area of the free storage area of the working port storage area Ra, that is, the first start storage memory number RaN for the upper working port incremented by 1 in the above-described step S402, is stored in the storage area Ra.

  When the second starting reserved memory number RbN for the lower operating port is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the first variation type counter CS1 are Stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the working port holding area Rb, that is, the holding area Rb corresponding to the second starting holding memory number RbN for the lower working port incremented by 1 in step S402.

  In subsequent steps S405 and S406, the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), recognize that the winning of the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 has occurred, and will be described later. A hold confirmation process and a hold command setting process, which are processes for executing a hold notice to be executed, are executed. Thereafter, when the winning detection flag is stored, the flag is erased and the information acquisition process is terminated.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S406 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S501) of the normal process to be described later. 33 and information on which of the winning entries to the lower operating opening 34 is based on winning is included, and the production control device 82 receives the hold command to receive each hold light emitting section. Processing for changing the display in 45 and 46 and the hold display areas Ga and Gb in accordance with the increase in the number of hold is executed.

  Specifically, in the production control device 82, when the received hold command corresponds to the upper operation port 33, each light emitting unit in the first hold light emitting unit 45 corresponds to the first start hold storage number RaN. Control to emit light by the number. Further, when the received hold command corresponds to the lower operation port 34, the light emission units in the second hold light emitting unit 46 are controlled to emit light in the number corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN. Further, when the command received by the display control device 212 via the effect control device 82 corresponds to winning in the upper working port 33, the above-mentioned hold display area Ga for the upper working port is described above. A process for displaying the hold image is executed. In the hold display area Ga, the hold image is displayed sequentially from the left side. For example, if the start hold storage number RaN for the upper working port is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 at the left end. If the start hold storage number RaN is 4, the hold image is displayed in all the hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4. If the command received by the display control device 212 via the effect control device 82 corresponds to winning in the lower working port 34, the command is put on hold in the lower working port hold display area Gb. A process for displaying an image is executed. In the hold display area Gb, hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the start hold storage number RbN for the lower working port is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Gb1 on the left end. If the start hold storage number RbN is 4, the hold image is displayed in all the hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4. A detailed description of each process in steps S405 and S406 will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S501 to S506 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S508 and S509 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S501. In the external signal output process of step S501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. In addition, when a special-purpose effect command such as a change command, a type command, or a change end command or a general-purpose effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  Next, in step S502, each variation type counter CS1 and CS2 is updated. Specifically, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the first variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the second variation type counter CS 2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S503, a game time control process for controlling a game in each special figure game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination on the special symbol side, symbol variable display setting by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

  After executing the game turn control process of step S503, the process proceeds to step S504, and the game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S505, an electric power support process for controlling a game in the normal game side is executed. In this electric support support process, the support determination on the normal side, the setting of the display of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41, the display control of the accessory display unit 44, and the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 are used. Drive control is performed.

  Each process of step S503 to step S505 will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S506, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 98. . Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

  In subsequent step S507, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S508, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. In step S509, each variation type counter CS1, CS2 is updated. Specifically, as in step S502, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S506 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, Each variation type counter CS1, CS2 can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S503 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S602, that is, the game times starting process of steps S603 to S605 and the game times progressing process of steps S606 to S609. End control processing. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the special game play is not started regardless of whether or not a prize is generated at the operation ports 33 and 34.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display. This determination is based on whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. This is done by judging. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  When the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start process in steps S603 to S605. In the game round start process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the start pending storage numbers RaN and RbN, is “0”. The case where the common reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved memory numbers RaN and RbN are “0” for both the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display in step S604. In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is performed, and then the game number control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the change start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S707 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S708 to S713.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second result display portion reservation area Rb, the second result display portion reservation corresponding to the lower operation port 34 is performed. The hold information stored in the area Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display portion, first, in step S702, the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display portion hold area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S703, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S704, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display section reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1.

  After that, in step S705, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area Ra1, and the second area Ra2 → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3 → the second area Ra2, the fourth area Ra4 → the third area Ra3.

  In the subsequent step S706, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S707, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) is set which is information for causing the presentation control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. . In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operating port 33. A special figure shift command including information indicating that it corresponds is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The special figure shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the effect control device 82, the number of the hold is reduced based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the first hold light emitting unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41. Execute the process to change in accordance with. This will be described in detail later.

  In the data setting process for the second result display section, first, in step S708, the second start reserved memory number RbN of the second result display section reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S709, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S710, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the first execution area AE1.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the memory | storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S711 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side. The data in the first area Rb1 is cleared and the second area Rb2 → The data in each area is shifted such as first area Rb1, third area Rb3 → second area Rb2, and fourth area Rb4 → third area Rb3.

  In subsequent step S712, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S713, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the production control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. . In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 34. The special figure shift command including information indicating that the action is being performed is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The special figure shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the effect control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the second hold light emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 are decreased. Execute the process to change in accordance with. This will be described in detail later.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored (stored) in the high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Determine whether. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of any probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  If it is not the high probability mode, in step S802, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is equal to the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. Determine whether you are doing it. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is determined in step S803 by referring to a high probability mode determination table. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area AE1 is equal to the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 8B. Determine whether you are doing it.

  After the process of step S802 or step S803, in step S804 to step S812, a process for setting the game result of the current special figure game times is executed, and the first result display is performed in the current special figure game times. For example, a process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed by either the part AS or the second result display part BS is terminated is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

  Specifically, first, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S805 to S811, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a big win are executed.

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, in step S806, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 9A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is a numerical range of a normal jackpot result, a numerical range of an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, a numerical range of an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, 15R Determine which of the numerical ranges for the probable jackpot result.

  On the other hand, if the second result display unit flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 9B) in step S807. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is included in the numerical range of the normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  After the processing of step S806 or step S807, in step S808, the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is any probability variation jackpot result (an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result). It is determined whether or not any of the results. If it is a probable jackpot result, in step S809, a stop result corresponding to occurrence of a probable jackpot result is displayed in the current special figure game times in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS. In this state, stop result setting processing for probability variation big hit to set to end the variable display is executed. In step S809, the MPU 202 stores information for specifying in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 which probability variation jackpot result is the result of determining whether or not the current special figure game times are correct. Specifically, in step S809, any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the implicit 2R probability change flag, and the 15R probability change flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S812.

  On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, referring to the normal jackpot stop result table, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area AE1 is acquired, and the address information is stored in the RAM 204. Is stored in the stop result address storage area. Also, in step S810, information for specifying in the MPU 202 whether the current determination result of the special figure game times is a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Specifically, in step S810, a normal flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S812.

  If the result of the lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S804, and the flow proceeds to step S811. In step S811, a miss for setting which one of the stop results is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS to end the variable display in the current special figure game round that is the outlier result. Execute the stop result setting process for the hour. Further, in step S811, various flag storage areas of the RAM 204 store information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the current determination result of the special figure game times is an outlier result (either a normal outage result or a special outage result). Stored in H.235. Specifically, in step S811, either a normal out flag or a special out flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S812.

  After executing any of the processes of step S809, step S810, and step S811, in step S812, the variable display time of the current special figure game times in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is set. The process of setting the variable display time for the purpose is executed.

  The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the current game result is one of each jackpot result or special loss result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the implicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal flag, and the special outlier flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the current game result is a normal off result, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current special figure game times. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area AE1 is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S902 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence / absence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203 is referred to.

  If an affirmative determination is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and this time is referred to with reference to the reach generation variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the like is acquired, and in the subsequent step S904, the fluctuation display time information is displayed in the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204). Set to measuring means). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery determination is a result of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode (any jackpot result or special loss result), or the result of the same lottery result is a normal loss result and for reach generation When the lottery is won, the reach display is executed.

  Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display having different display modes. The variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation. By referring to the table, the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is provided. By referring to the table, the first variation type counter of this time is provided. The reach display corresponding to the value of CS1 is determined.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S902, the current first variation type counter CS1 is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 in step S905. In step S906, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. Thereafter, the setting process ends. Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of start pending storage numbers RaN and RbN increases.

  The variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time when a reach occurs. Further, the variable display time information in the normal reach display is set so that the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time in the super reach display. That is, each of the above variable display time information is set so that the variable display time becomes longer in the order of no reach occurrence <normal reach display <super reach display.

  In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter display time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Although the generation variation display time table is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation display time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach. It is good also as a structure. In addition, a variation display time table for various probability variation jackpots, a normal display variation display time table, a variation display time table for outreach and a variation display time table for complete loss may be set individually. .

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined using parameters such as the presence / absence of reach, the type of reach display, the number of hold information, the value of the variation type counter, and the like. However, the variable display time of each game time is the content of other hold information, specifically, jackpot determination information, type determination information and reach determination information included in the other hold information as parameters. Decided without.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 18), after step S812, a special figure change command and a special figure type command are set in step S813. The special figure change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The special figure type command includes information on game results. In other words, the special figure type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, and special outlook result information. Etc. are included.

  The special figure change command and special figure type command set in step S813 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the special figure game times based on the received special figure change command and the special figure type command, and sets various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. Control. The contents of the effect include the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each special symbol game time is performed.

  After that, in step S814, the variable display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times among the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times is identified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit When the flag is stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current special figure game times is specified as the second result display unit BS. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 16), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the game times progression process, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game times variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process as described above. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display process, the result display unit is controlled so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit relating to the current special figure game times (light emission control of each display segment). ) And the game times control process is terminated.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S608. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in the process of any one of the above steps S809, S810, and S811 is specified, and the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. The main display unit 43 is controlled.

  In the subsequent step S609, a special figure change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The special figure change end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so that the combination of the final stop symbols in the special figure game times is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) by receiving the special figure change end command.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process of step S504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the change display of the picture in the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS of one special figure game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the game result of the current special figure game times corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, or the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, an opening / closing execution mode start process is executed in step S1004. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without opening the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is set for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  In the subsequent step S1005, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output.

  In a succeeding step S1006, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1007. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, if the high-frequency winning mode is set, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S1008.

  After executing the processing of step S1007 or step S1008, a special figure opening command is set in step S1009. The set special figure opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This special figure opening command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received special figure opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In subsequent step S1010, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability variation flag, the non-explicit 2R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, and any one of the flags is stored. In this case, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what happened.

  Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, or the special out flag is stored in the RAM 204. When the flag is stored, the signal output state of the jackpot and special out signal output terminal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot and special out signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot and special out signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the big hit and special out signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine in the management control device. 10 that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a big winning opening / closing process is executed in step S1012. Here, the special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 32c. If the big prize opening 32a is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” in step S1102, and provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1103. It is determined whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”.

  When the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” or when the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, the big prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” and the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1104, and variable prize driving is performed to open the big prize opening 32a. The unit 32c is set in a driving state.

  In subsequent step S1105, setting processing for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is set. In the case of the high-frequency winning mode, in step S1202, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in order to measure the opening / closing timing for opening and closing the special winning opening 32a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. In subsequent step S1203, “10” is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 32a. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in step S1204, and the first winning is performed in subsequent step S1205. “6” is set in the counter area PC1. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  After executing the setting process for each round in the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 21), a special figure opening command is set in step S1106, and the big prize opening opening / closing process is ended. The set special figure release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This special figure release command includes information on whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the received release command in the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening is open, the process advances to step S1107 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”. If the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step S1109, and then whether or not the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is “0” in step S1110. If it is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If the value of the first timer area T1 is “0” in step S1107, or if the value of the first prize counter area PC1 is “0” in step S1110, it is confirmed that the special prize opening closing condition is satisfied. means. In such a case, in step S1111, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set to a non-driven state so as to close the special winning opening 32a.

  In the following step S1112, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step S1113, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1114 whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is set.

  In the case of the high-frequency winning mode, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1, and in the case of the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0. 0) is set in the first timer area T1. 2 sec) is set. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the time during which the large winning opening 32a is closed between rounds is set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. Thereafter, a special figure closing command is set in step S1117, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set special figure closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This special figure closing command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is selected. In the effect control device 82, in the high-frequency winning mode, the content of the effect corresponding to the received close command is determined, and various devices are controlled so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S1118. In the start process, an ending standby time for waiting without starting the next special figure game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1119, after setting the special figure ending command, the main prize winning opening / closing process is ended. The set special figure ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The special figure ending command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received special figure ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 20), after executing the big prize opening / closing process in step S1012, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. In step S1014, it is determined whether the ending standby time has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1015. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, in step S1302, a flag erasing process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the states are maintained. In the subsequent step S1303, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S1304, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, the gaming state is also referred to as a special advantageous state). After executing the process of step S1304, the migration process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored. If the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored, the flag erasure process is executed in step S1306. Thereafter, in step S1307, the high probability mode flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. After executing the processing of step S1307, the migration processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1305 that the implicit 2R probability variation flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1308 whether the normal jackpot flag is stored. If the normal jackpot flag is stored, the flag erasure process is executed in step S1309. Thereafter, in step S1310, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S1311, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode ends when the special figure game times continue 100 times, and thereafter, the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. After executing the process of step S1311, the migration process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1308 that the normal jackpot flag is not stored, the migration processing is terminated as it is. In other words, when the result is a special losing result and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state of the special figure game times resulting in the special losing result is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 20), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1015 is terminated, a round display termination process is performed in step S1016. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. That is, the round display in the round display unit RS is started when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. In this case, when the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a is smaller and the opening time and closing time of the large winning opening 32a are set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. . Therefore, the period during which the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display portion RS is shorter than that in the high-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the result display that is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS is started when the special figure game times are ended, and is continued until the next special figure game times are started. Is done. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the result display starts before the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display unit RS and after the display of the content of the number of rounds is finished. Will continue. That is, the result display is maintained for a longer period than the display of the content of the number of rounds.

  After that, in step S1017, after executing the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the gaming state transition processing ends. In the open / close execution mode end processing, if the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special out flag are stored, they are erased and are not already stored. If so, keep that state.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the electric role support process, a general game game time control process is executed in step S1401, a general game state transition process is executed in step S1402, and the support process ends.

  In other words, the electric role support process basically has the same configuration as that of the special game side game turn control process (FIG. 16) and the game state transition process (FIG. 20). The usual game time control process corresponds to the special game side game time control process of FIG. 16, and the general game state transition process of step S1402 corresponds to the special game side game state transition process of FIG. Hereinafter, the game time control process (step S1401) and the game state transition process (step S1402) on the normal side will be described in detail.

<General game play control processing>
First, the general game game control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the usual game play control process, it is determined in step S1501 whether or not it is in a support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support status flag (support status information) is stored (stored) in the support status flag storage area (support status information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The support state flag is stored when shifting to a support state in which the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is controlled in a general game state transition process to be described later, and also when the support state is ended in the general game state transition process. Will be erased.

  If it is in the support state, the processing after step S1502, that is, the general game game start processing at steps S1503 to S1505 and the general game game progress processing at steps S1506 to S1509 are not executed. Then, the ordinary figure game times control process is terminated. That is, when the player is in the support state, the usual game game is not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred.

  If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the accessory display unit 44 is in a variable display. In this determination, the normal variation display flag (second variation display information) is stored in the normal variation display flag storage area (second variation display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 ( This is done by determining whether or not it is stored. The normal fluctuation display flag is stored when the variable display of the accessory display unit 44 is started, and is deleted when the fluctuation display ends.

  If the accessory display unit 44 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the general game game start process in steps S1503 to S1505. In the general game game start process, first, in step S1503, it is determined whether or not the general graphic holding storage number FN is “0”. In the case where the customary reserved storage number FN is “0”, the power support process is terminated as it is. If the usual figure reserved storage number FN is not “0”, a usual figure data setting process for setting the data stored in the reserved role area Rc for variable display in step S1504 is executed. In the normal data setting process, the general-purpose reserved memory number FN is decremented by one, and the data stored in the first area of the call-use reserved area Rc is moved to the second execution area AE2. And the process which shifts the data stored in each memory | storage area of the electric power holding area Rc is performed. That is, the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side, and the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared and the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1. The data in each area is shifted such that the third area Rc3 → the second area Rc2 and the fourth area Rc4 → the third area Rc3. Then, a general map shift command (general map shift occurrence information), which is information for causing the presentation control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area on the normal map side has been shifted is set. To do. In this case, the ordinary figure shift command is read from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, and the ordinary figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  After executing the ordinary figure data setting process in step S1504, the ordinary figure variation start process is executed in step S1505, and then this ordinary figure game times control process is terminated.

  Here, the common map change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the usual map change start process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204. As described above, the high-frequency support flag is stored in the game state transition process on the special figure side, and then erased when the transition condition is satisfied (when the special figure game times continue 100 times).

  If it is not the high-frequency support mode, the success / failure determination (support lottery) is performed with reference to the low-frequency support mode success / failure table in step S1602, and if it is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is high. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the frequency support mode. Note that, as already described, in the present embodiment, a common use pass / fail table is used regardless of the level of the support mode, and the pass / fail table referred to in step S1602 and the step S1603 are used. The success / failure table to be referred to is the same (see FIG. 8C). For this reason, the process for determining the level of the support mode in step S1601 may be omitted.

  After the process of step S1602 or step S1603, in step S1604 to step S1611, a process for setting the game result of the current general game game time is executed, and the display for an accessory in the current general game game time is performed. For example, processing for setting a stop result when the variable display executed by the unit 44 is terminated is executed. When setting a stop result, out of various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in a stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, a stop result table for ordinary use Is referenced.

  Specifically, first, in step S1604, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1602 or step S1603 is a support status win. In the case of winning the support state, in steps S1605 to S1610, processing for setting a game result in the case of winning the support state, processing for setting a stop result, and the like are executed.

  In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the high frequency support mode flag is not stored, in step S1606, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the common frequency distribution table for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 10A). Specifically, the value of the release type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is a numerical range of the first release result A, a numerical range of the second release result B, and a numerical range of the third release result C. Which is included is determined.

  On the other hand, if the high-frequency support mode flag is stored, in step S1607, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the general-purpose distribution table for the high-frequency support mode (FIG. 10B). Specifically, the value of the release type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is a numerical range of the first release result A, a numerical range of the second release result B, and a numerical range of the third release result C. Which is included is determined.

  Here, in step S1606 and step S1607, only the numerical range of each release result A to C is referred to as the type of release mode in the support status win, and the release results A1 to A3, B1 to B3, and C1 as groups below that. It is not performed until -C3 is specified.

  After the process of step S1606 or step S1607, in step S1608, the game result distributed in step S1606 or step S1607 is one of the high winning support states (second release result B or third release result C). It is determined whether or not. If it is the result of the high winning support state, in step S1609, it is displayed that the high winning support state will occur as a result of the stop of the display unit 44 for the character in the current game game round. A stop result setting process for the high winning support state for setting to end the variable display in the state is executed. More specifically, referring to the stop result table for the high winning support state, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is acquired, The address information is stored in the usual stop result address storage area in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. In step S1609, the MPU 202 stores information for identifying in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 that the result of determining whether or not the current game game is currently successful is an open result that results in one of the high winning support states. To do. Specifically, in step S1609, either the second release flag or the third release flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1612.

  On the other hand, if the game result assigned in step S1606 or step S1607 is not the result of the high winning support state, that is, if the distributed game result is the first release result A and the low winning support state is set, in step S1608 A negative determination is made and processing proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, referring to the stop result table for the low winning support state, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is acquired, and the address information Is stored in the usual stop result address storage area. In step S1610, the MPU 202 stores information for specifying in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 that the current game-game play determination result is a release result that results in a low winning support state. Specifically, in step S1610, the first release flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1612.

  If the result of the lottery in step S1602 or step S1603 is not a support status win, a negative determination is made in step S1604, and the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, the variable display is ended in a state in which it is displayed that neither the high winning support state nor the low winning support state is generated as a stop result of the accessory display unit 44 in the current ordinary game game round. Execute the outage stop result setting process for setting. More specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the release type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for detachment, and the address information is Of the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204, it is stored in the stop result address storage area for ordinary use. In step S1611, the MPU 202 stores information for specifying in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 that the result of determining whether or not the current ordinary game game is a missed result. Specifically, in step S1611, an unillustrated flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1612.

  After executing any of the processes of step S1609, step S1610, and step S1611, in step S1612, the normal map variable display for setting the variable display time of the current general game game time on the accessory display unit 44. Execute the time setting process.

  In the processing for setting the normal map display time, the presence or absence of the high frequency support mode flag is checked to determine whether it is the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the like of this time is acquired by referring to the usual figure fluctuation display time table for the high frequency support mode stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 223. Then, a value corresponding to the information is set in the usual variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. On the other hand, in the case of the low frequency support mode, the current second variation type counter CS2 is referred to by referring to the normal variation display time table for the low frequency support mode stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value or the like is acquired, and a value corresponding to the information is set in the usual variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In these ordinary map variable display time table for high frequency support mode and common map variable display time table for low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode averages the variable display time than the low frequency support mode. Is set to be shorter.

  In each variation display time table, a plurality of types of variation display times are set, and the variation display time corresponding to the value of the second variation type counter CS2 is selected. In this case, a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the high frequency support mode may be set to be longer than a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the low frequency support mode. Even if the time is selected, the high frequency support mode may be set to be shorter than the low frequency support mode. Further, the variable display time may be set to be different depending on the number of the general-purpose reserved memory number FN as well as the value of the second variable type counter CS2. The display time may be set to be short, and vice versa.

  After executing the normal map change display time setting process in step S1612, a normal map change command and a general map type command are set in step S1613. The common map change command includes information on the normal map change display time. Further, the game type command includes game result information. In other words, the common command type command includes, as game result information, first release result A, second release result B, third release result C, missed result information, and the like.

  The common map change command and the general map type command set in step S1613 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect in the ordinary game game based on the received ordinary map change command and the ordinary map type command, and sets various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. Control. The contents of the effect include the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to perform a variable display of symbols corresponding to each ordinary game time.

  Thereafter, in step S <b> 1614, the variation display of the pattern is started on the accessory display unit 44. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the general-purpose game times control process (FIG. 25), when the accessory display unit 44 is variably displayed, the general-purpose game times progression process of steps S1506 to S1509 is executed. In the process for progressing the general game times, first, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the variable display time of the current general game times has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information for ordinary use stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the usual variable display time setting process. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S1507. In the variable display processing, display of the accessory display unit 44 is controlled so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the accessory display unit 44 (light emission control of each display segment). Then, the ordinary figure game times control process is terminated.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S1508. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any of the processes in steps S1609, S1610, and S611, and the symbol corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the accessory display unit 44. The accessory display unit 44 is controlled.

  In a succeeding step S1509, a normal change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The common map change end command set in step S1509 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 and the like so that the combination of the final stop symbols in the general game game times is confirmed and displayed (final stop display) by receiving the normal diagram change end command.

<Normal game state transition processing>
Next, the general game state transition process of step S1402 in the electric role support process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether it is in a support state. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S1702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the change display of the symbol of one ordinary game game is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the fluctuation display for the usual figure is finished, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the game result of the current ordinary figure game times corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first release flag, the second release flag, and the third release flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, support state start processing is executed in step S1704. In the start process, a waiting time (first waiting period) for normal opening for waiting without starting the opening of the electric accessory 34a for the opening in the support state is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the normal opening that is stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the counter area for the normal waiting time provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The support state start process will be described later in detail.

  In a succeeding step S1705, it is determined whether or not the current support state is a high winning support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the second release flag or the third release flag is stored in the RAM 204. If it is not in the high winning support state, that is, if it is in the low winning support state, “2” is set in the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1706. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened. On the other hand, if it is in the high winning support state, “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S1707.

  After executing the processing of step S1706 or step S1707, a normal map opening command is set in step S1708. The set general map opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This ordinary figure opening command includes information indicating whether the state is a high winning support state or a low winning support state, and waiting time information for the usual figure opening set in step S1703. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the support state based on the received ordinary opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

  In the subsequent step S1709, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the accessory release signal output terminal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the open signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the accessory release signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the accessory release signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device outputs the accessory release signal to the pachinko machine 10. That the support status has occurred.

  Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not the second release flag or the third release flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any one of the flags is stored, the external output terminal 99 is provided. The signal output state of the output terminal for the high winning support state signal is set as the high winning support state signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the high winning support status signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the high winning support status signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine in the management control device. 10, it can be understood that a high winning support state has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S1701 that the current state is the support state, the process advances to step S1710. In step S1710, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the accessory opening / closing process is executed in step S1711. Here, the accessory opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the electric accessory driving unit 34b. If the electric accessory 34a is not being opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” in step S1802, and provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1803. It is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”.

  When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, or when the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the real accessory opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” and the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1804, and the electric accessory to open the electric accessory 34a. The drive part 34b is made into a drive state (community release process).

  In a succeeding step S1805, a setting process for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a high winning support state is set. If it is in the high winning support state, “1500” (that is, 3 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1902 in order to measure the opening / closing timing for opening / closing the electric accessory 34a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. In the subsequent step S1903, “6” is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the electric accessory 34a. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If it is not in the high winning support state, that is, if it is in the low winning support state, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1904, and then the second winning is in step S1905. “3” is set in the counter area PC2. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  After executing the setting process for each round in the accessory opening / closing process (FIG. 28), a normal figure opening command is set in step S1806, and the accessory opening / closing process ends. The set general map release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This ordinary release command includes information indicating whether the high winning support state or the low winning support state is set. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to each support state based on the received normal map release command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If the electric accessory 34a is open in step S1801, the process advances to step S1807 to determine whether the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1808 whether or not a game ball has won the electric accessory 34a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the lower operation port 34. To do. If no prize has been generated, the main article opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, after decrementing the value of the second winning counter area PC2 by 1 in step S1809, whether or not the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is “0” in step S1810. If it is not “0”, the main article opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0” in step S1807, or if the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is “0” in step S1810, it means that the accessory closing condition is satisfied. To do. In such a case, in step S1811, the electric accessory driving unit 34b is set in a non-driven state to close the electric accessory 34a (an accessory closing process).

  In the subsequent step S1812, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S1813, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1814 whether or not a high winning support state is set.

  If it is not the high winning support state but the low winning support state, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1815, and if it is the high winning support state, the process proceeds to step S1816. Then, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. That is, in the high winning support state, the standby time (third standby period) in the closed state in which the electric accessory 34a is closed between rounds is set shorter than in the low winning support state. After executing the process of step S1815 or step S1816, a common figure closing command is set in step S1817, and the main article opening / closing process is terminated. The set general map closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The usual command closing command includes information indicating whether the high winning support state or the low winning support state. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to each support state based on the received ordinary map closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1813 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, a support state end process is executed in step S1818. In this process, a waiting time for second-order ending (second waiting period) for waiting for the ending in the support state without starting the next ordinary-game play is set. More specifically, standby time information for normal ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a counter area for normal time for standby provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The support state termination process will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S1819, after setting the ordinary ending command, the main article opening / closing process is ended. The set ordinary ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The usual ending command includes information on whether the winning support state is the high winning support state or the low winning support state and the waiting time information for the usual ending set in step S1818. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received ordinary ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display (for example, animation display) corresponding to the current support state is performed based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82.

  Returning to the description of the normal game state transition process (FIG. 27), after executing the accessory opening / closing process in step S1711, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. In step S1713, it is determined whether the ending standby time has elapsed. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S1714, a support state end process is executed. In the support state termination process, various support state flags such as a first release flag, a second release flag, and a third release flag are erased. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

<About the waiting time before and after the support status>
Here, as described above, when the support state is won, a waiting time for the normal opening (first waiting period) is set, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is started after the opening waiting time elapses. . In addition, after the end of the support state, a waiting time for the usual ending (second waiting period) is set, and after the ending waiting time elapses, the next usual figure game is started. In these standby times, an effect for notifying the start and end of the support state is performed.

  As described above, the support state is a state that shifts when the support state is won in the ordinary game game, and a winning to the lower operation port 34 is likely to occur by entering the support state. Then, when a winning in the lower working port 34 occurs, a special figure game round is executed. Further, the support mode is shifted according to the result of the special figure game times. In other words, the frequency of execution of special figure game times may differ depending on the result of the special figure game times, and the frequency of execution of the special figure game times may differ depending on the result of the special figure game times. As described above, one game result is indirectly related to the other game result, but the game times are linked to each other. On the other hand, both are executed in parallel, and the player may be confused as to which game times should be noted. In particular, for the notification of the start (opening) and the end (ending) of the support state as described above, it is possible that a winning to the electric accessory 34a may occur (the start condition of the special figure game times is likely to be satisfied). In addition, the fact that the situation can be finished (the start condition of the special figure game times is difficult to be established) is considered to be as low as possible for the player.

  An example of the opening effect and the ending effect on the normal side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an opening effect for a general map, and FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an ending effect for a general map. (C) is a timing chart for explaining the progress status of the general game times, and FIG. 30 (d) is a timing chart for explaining the status of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a.

  For example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display in the general chart display area P ends at the general game game time ended at the timing t1, and the result of the general game game time is a result of shifting to the support state. In this case, after an opening standby time from the timing t1 to the timing t2, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the open state at the timing t2, and shifts to the closed state at the timing t3. Thereafter, the opening / closing control is performed until the second round counter area RC2 becomes “0”. The control until the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state as described above and then shifts to the closed state is also referred to as unit opening / closing control (unit variable acceptance control).

  As the last unit opening / closing control in the support state, the electric accessory 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state at the timing t4, and is closed at the timing t5. The period in which the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state from the timing t5 to the timing t6 and the next ordinary game play is not started is the ending waiting time. After the ending waiting time elapses (timing t6) ), The display of the fluctuation of the next ordinary game times is started.

  As an opening effect, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), for example, adjacent to the general map display area P as an area that does not overlap with the special display game times variation display or the special display side hold display areas Ga and Gb. In the area (left side), a character display such as “Start Help !!” is displayed. This opening effect is continuously displayed over the waiting time for opening. In addition, in the waiting time for opening, it is good also as a structure from which presentation content changes with progress of time. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports how long time the electrically-driven accessory 34a will be in an open state, and it is good also as a structure which the display content changes with progress of time by a countdown format.

  As an ending effect, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), for example, adjacent to the general map display area P as an area that does not overlap with the fluctuation display of the special figure game times and the reserved display areas Ga and Gb on the special figure side. In the area (left side), a character display such as “End of help !!” is displayed. This ending effect is continuously displayed over the ending standby time. In the ending standby time, the content of the effect may change with the passage of time. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs an ending effect in the area | region different from an opening effect.

  The opening effect and the ending effect are different in the execution mode depending on the opening result in the support state.

  Here, the relationship between each result, its opening / closing mode, the length of each standby time, and its effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  As already explained, the first release results A1 to A3 are game results in which the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a is in the low winning support state, and the second release results B1 to B3 and the third release results C1 to C3 are electric actors. This is a game result in which the opening / closing mode of the object 34a is in the high winning support state. In the low winning support state, the electric accessory 34a is opened twice, and the open state is maintained for 0.2 sec, which is shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Hateful. In the case of the high winning support state, the electric accessory 34a is opened three times. Each open state is maintained for 3 seconds, which is longer than the game ball launch cycle, and game balls are more likely to enter compared to the low winning support state. In each support state, the standby time (third standby period) in the closed state between the open state and the open state is 2 seconds in the low winning support state and 0.2 sec in the high winning support state. The high winning support state is set shorter than the low winning support state.

  In such a configuration, depending on the game result, the length of the waiting time for opening (hereinafter also referred to as OP period) and the contents of the effect (hereinafter also referred to as OP effect) and the waiting time for ending (hereinafter also referred to as ED period). ) And the content of the production (hereinafter also referred to as ED production) are different from each other.

  In both the OP period and the ED period, a long-time mode that is relatively long and a short-time mode that is short are set. In the OP effect, the OP1 effect and the OP2 effect are set differently in the contents of the effect (for example, displayed words and characters are different), and the OP effect is not performed (after the ordinary game game is finished). It is also set in the case where it is not notified that the support state is entered. In the ED effect, the ED1 effect and the ED2 effect are set differently (for example, displayed words and characters are different), and the ED effect is not performed (notification that the support state has ended). Is not set).

  Among the first opening results A, the first opening result A1 and the first opening result A2 are both in a short-time manner in both the OP period and the ED period, and neither the OP effect nor the ED effect is executed. On the other hand, even if it is the 1st opening result A, if it is the 1st opening result A3, both OP period and ED period will be a mode for a long time, OP production will perform OP1 production, and ED production will perform ED1 production. In the second release result B, in the case of the second release result B1, both the OP period and the ED period are in a long time mode, the OP effect is the OP1 effect, and the ED effect is the ED1 effect. In the second release result B3, both the OP period and the ED period are in a short-time manner, and neither the OP effect nor the ED effect is executed. Further, among the third release results C, the third release result C3 is in a short-time manner in both the OP period and the ED period, and neither the OP effect nor the ED effect is executed. That is, the first opening result A3 and the second opening result B1 have different opening / closing modes, but the waiting time before and after the opening / closing control is the same, and the effect contents before and after the opening / closing control are also the same. . The first opening results A1, A2, the second opening result B3, and the third opening result C3 are different in opening / closing mode, but have the same waiting time before and after the opening / closing control, and before and after the opening / closing control. The production contents are also the same. Therefore, it is difficult to identify the content of the opening / closing control (whether it is in the low winning support state or the high winning support state) from the standby time before and after the opening / closing control (especially before the opening / closing control) and its effect. .

  In the case of the second release result B2 among the second release results B and in the case of the third release results C1 and C2 among the third release results C, the OP period and the ED period are the first release result A3 and the first release result A3. Although it is the same long time aspect as 2 open result B1, the production content is different. That is, in the third release result C1, the OP effect is an OP2 effect different from the OP1 effect, and the ED effect is an ED2 effect different from the ED1 effect. Further, the OP effect and the ED effect are not performed in the second release result B2 and the third release result C2. That is, if the OP effect after the usual game play is performed is the OP2 effect, it is determined that the third release result C1 is in the high winning support state, so that the player goes to the contents of the OP effect. It is thought that it pays attention. In addition, even if the OP effect is not performed, if the OP period is a long time mode, the second release result in which the high winning support state is entered instead of the first opening results A1 and A2 that are in the low winning support state. Since it is determined that it is B2 or the third release result C2, it is possible to attract attention to the period after the ordinary game game ends, and as a result, when the ordinary game time ends It is also possible to increase the degree of attention to the ordinary game times themselves.

  As described above, the mode of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a based on the game result of the ordinary game game and the waiting time before and after the opening / closing control are closely related to the effect content on the display screen G, It is considered that the player grasps the game result of the ordinary game times from the effect contents on the display screen G, and predicts and enjoys which support state to shift to after that.

  On the other hand, depending on the gaming state that is shifted according to the game result of the special figure game times, the degree of attention to the game result of the ordinary figure game times, the OP effect, the ED effect, and the like may be different. That is, for example, during the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is frequently in a support state, so that each time a regular game play, OP production, ED production, etc. are performed, the player feels troublesome. There is also a possibility of end. Further, in a situation where the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed as in the opening / closing execution mode, it is considered that the variable winning device 32 is more interested in opening / closing the shift than in the support state. Even if a support state transition or end notification (OP effect or ED effect) is performed in a difficult situation, not only is there a possibility that it will be missed, but processing is also performed by opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 and corresponding effects. If the notification process of the support state is further added in a situation where the load increases, there is a concern that the processing load will increase extremely.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the OP period, the ED period, the OP effect, and the ED effect are set differently depending on the game state on the special drawing side. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, in the low frequency support mode, the first release result A3, the second release result B1, B2, and the third release result C1, C2 in which the OP period and the ED period are in a long mode. The probability of distribution is 22/30 when the opening type counter C5 is 6 to 19, 20 to 23, 25 to 28, whereas the first opening result A1, in which the OP period and the ED period are in a short time mode. The probability of being distributed to A2, the second release result B3, and the third release result C3 is that the release type counter C5 is 0 to 5, 24, 29 and is 8/30, and the probability of becoming a long time mode is a short time mode. It is higher than the probability of becoming. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the OP period and the ED period are distributed to the first release result A3, the second release result B1, B2, and the third release result C1, C2 in which the mode is long. While the opening type counter C5 is 6/9, 10, 11, 20, 21 and is 8/30, the first opening results A1, A2, and 2 Probabilities of being distributed to the release result B3 and the third release result C3 are 0 to 5, 12 to 19, and 22 to 29 for the opening type counter C5, which is 22/30. The probability is lower. In other words, the case where the support status is won in the normal drawing lottery in the low frequency support mode (steps S1601 to S1604) is longer than the case where the support status is won in the high frequency support mode. The OP period and the ED period are easily set, and the OP period and the ED period are not easily set.

  As shown in FIG. 10, for the OP effect and the ED effect, in the low frequency support mode, the OP effect and the ED effect are distributed to the first opening result A3, the second opening result B1, and the third opening result C1. The probability that the opening type counter C5 is 6-19, 20-22, 25-27 and is 20/30, whereas the OP results and the ED effects are not performed, the first opening results A1, A2, The probability of distribution to the 2 release results B2, B3 and the third release results C2, C3 is 0/5, 23, 24, 28, 29, and 10/30, and OP production and ED production are performed. The probability of being played is higher than the probability of not performing OP production or ED production. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of distribution to the first release result A3, the second release result B1, and the third release result C1 in which the OP effect and the ED effect are performed is 6 to 6 in the open type counter C5. The first opening result A1, A2, the second opening result B2, B3, the third opening result C2, C3 in which the OP effect and the ED effect are not performed, whereas the cases are 9, 10, 20 and 6/30. The probability of being distributed to the opening type counter C5 is 0-5, 11-19, 21-29, and 24/30, and the probability that the OP effect or ED effect is performed is the probability that the OP effect or ED effect is not performed. Is lower than. In other words, when the support status win is selected in the lottery for lottery during the low frequency support mode (steps S1601 to S1604), the OP effect or ED production is easy to perform.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state (the level of the support mode) based on whether or not the special figure is successful, the length of the OP period and the ED period before and after the support state, the execution frequency of the effects performed during that period, Are set differently. Hereinafter, as the process for setting in this way, the support state start process (step S1704) in the universal game state transition process and the support state end process (step S1818) in the accessory opening / closing process will be described in detail. explain. The support state start process and the support state end process have the same basic processing configuration and will be described together.

<Support status start processing and support status end processing>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32 (support state start process) and the flowchart of FIG. 33 (support state end process), first, in step S2001 (S2101), as the process of grasping the game state on the special figure side, It is determined whether or not the frequency support mode is in effect. If it is in the high frequency support mode, in step S2002 (S2102), refer to the distribution table for common maps at the time of high frequency support, and if it is in the low frequency support mode instead of the high frequency support mode In step S2003 (S2103), the distribution table for ordinary maps during low frequency support is referred to. After grasping the type of the current support state in step S2002 (S2102) or step S2003 (S2103), the type of the current support state is determined in step S2004 (S2104) as the first release result A1, A2, second. It is determined whether or not it is one of the release result B3 and the third release result C3. If it is one of these, the process proceeds to step S2005 (S2105), "2" is input to the second timer area T2, and the length of the current OP period (ED period) is set as a short time mode. Set (ie set to 4 msec). If a negative determination is made in step S2004 (S2104), it is determined in step S2006 (S2106) whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is in the open / close execution mode, the process advances to step S2004 (S2104) to set the short-time mode. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode in step S2006 (S2106), “500” is input to the second timer area T2 in step S2007 (S2107), and the length of the current OP period (ED period) Is set as a long-term mode (that is, set to 1 sec). After executing the process of step S2005 (S2105) or step S2007 (S2107), the support state start process (end process) is terminated.

  The information of the OP period (ED period) set in these processes is set in the ordinary figure opening command / ordinary figure ending command set in step S1708 or step S1819, and the production control which is the sub-side control device. It is output to the device 82. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so that the symbol display device 41 executes the OP effect and the ED effect corresponding to the OP period (ED period) based on the reception of these commands. As described above, in the present embodiment, the contents of the OP effect and the ED effect are set so as to correspond one-to-one with the game result on the normal side, the OP period, and the ED period. Therefore, on the side of the production control device 82, the OP period (ED period) included in the command and the support chart that triggered the support status based on the reception of the general map opening command / standard map ending command. If the game result on the side is grasped, the OP effect and the ED effect to be executed can be grasped.

  In the above configuration, it can also be said that the OP period and the ED period are set based on the contents of the effects (OP effects, presence / absence and type of ED effects) performed by the sub-side control device. In other words, in the support state on the normal map side, as described above, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the effects performed by the control device on the sub side and the game result on the normal map side, and the game result is grasped. It can also be said that the production on the sub-side is grasped. In the special drawing side effect, even if the game result is the same, a configuration in which a plurality of types of sub side effects are set for the game result to diversify the effect is common. Therefore, even if the main controller 81 grasps the game result on the special figure side, it is difficult to specify the content of the effect performed on the sub-side, or the processing load becomes extremely large if the configuration is made to specify that. Can increase. On the other hand, since the special drawing side has an auxiliary role on the special drawing side, the production on the special drawing side is less necessary to diversify the production than the special drawing side. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even if the game results and the production contents are associated one-to-one, the processing load does not increase drastically, and the main controller 81 side matches the production contents on the sub side. Control of the support state (opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a, control of the OP period and ED period) can be performed, and association with the production can be easily performed.

<Electric Configurations of Effect Control Device 82 and Display Control Device 212>
Next, a configuration for performing various effects will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a special figure hold display control command (first hold display control information) such as a special figure shift command or a special figure hold command to be described later is received. Also, a special figure game time control command (first game time control information) such as a special figure change command, a special figure type command, and a special figure change end command is received. In addition, an open / close execution mode command (first state transition information) such as a special figure opening command and a special figure ending command is received. Further, a general map hold display control command (second hold display control information) such as a general map shift command or a general map hold command to be described later is received. Also, a general game game control command (second game game control information) such as a general game change command, a general game type command, and a general game change end command is received. Also, a support status command (second status transition information) such as a general map opening command and a general map ending command is received.

  In the ROM 243, various table storage areas 245 for storing various tables used for executing various control processes received from the main control device 81 are set. The RAM 244 receives various address storage areas 246 used for storing address information for various effects, various flag storage areas 247 used for executing various control processes, and received from the main control device 81. The command storage area 248 for temporarily storing the command, the various counter areas 249 used for executing various control processes, and the hold information on the special map side and the general information based on the commands from the main control device 81 A holding storage area 250 for storing holding information on the drawing side is set. The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored commands.

  The storage area for holding 250 corresponds to the holding ball storage area 232 and the electric role holding area 233 in the main control device 81. As shown in FIG. 35, the storage area for holding 250 corresponds to the holding ball storage area 232 on the main controller 81 side, and the first sub-side holding area 250a, the second sub-side holding area 250b, and the first sub-side. And an execution area SAE1. The first secondary reservation area 250a corresponds to the first result display area reservation area Ra on the main controller 81 side, and the second secondary storage area 250b corresponds to the second result display area reservation area Rb. The first secondary execution area SAE1 corresponds to the first execution area AE1. And the 1st subside reservation area 250a and the 2nd subside reservation area 250b have four storage areas, a 1st area, a 2nd area, a 3rd area, and a 4th area, respectively. Each area is set so as to be able to store information included in the command related to the hold information on the special drawing side received from the main control device 81 side.

  In addition, the storage area for holding 250 includes a sub-side power-holding area 250c and a second sub-side execution area SAE2 corresponding to the power-holding area 233 on the main control device 81 side. The sub-side power role reservation area 250c corresponds to the power role reservation area Rc, and the second sub-side execution area SAE2 corresponds to the second execution area AE2. The sub-side electric power reservation area 250c has four storage areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively. Each area is set so as to be able to store information included in a command related to the hold information on the normal side received from the main control device 81 side.

  As described above, the holding light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. Yes.

  The MPU 252 receives, from the effect control device 82, a special figure hold display control command (first hold display control information) for performing the special figure hold display control, and a special figure for performing the variable display of the special figure side symbol. A command for controlling game times (first game time control information), a command for opening / closing execution mode (first state transition information) for displaying a moving image during the opening / closing execution mode, and the like are received. Further, a command for holding a general map display for controlling the hold display on the side of the normal (second hold display control information), a command for controlling a general game play for displaying the symbols on the side of the general map ( (Second game time control information), a support state command (second state transition information) for performing an effect during the support state, and the like are received. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 255).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Explanation regarding special drawing game times>
Here, an outline of effects of special figure game times using the display screen G will be described.

  First, the variation display of the special figure game times will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the special figure game times are started, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 36B, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 is finished, and the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the fluctuation display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, and the fluctuation display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 switches from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Thereafter, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 ends.

  After all the symbols Z1 to Z3 change, a standby time (standby period) is maintained (for example, 2 seconds) for maintaining the stop display for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). A definite display for clearly showing the game result of the game to the player is performed. Then, when the standby time elapses with a combination of symbols (specific symbols or non-specific symbols) corresponding to the jackpot result on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the jackpot result is generated and then opening / closing is performed. Transition to mode.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to the symbols that stop on the effective lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G, the symbol that stops outside the frame shifted from the left line L1 by one symbol to the change destination side, and the right line L3 Is set so that an effect using a symbol that stops outside the frame shifted to the variation base side by one symbol is performed. That is, a part of the symbols (particularly main symbols) that stop outside these frames is displayed on the display screen G, and after the end of the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (after being temporarily stopped), A re-variation effect that moves the partially displayed symbols to the effective lines L1 to L5 is set.

  Prior to detailed description of this re-variation effect, ineffective lines set as lines different from the effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of symbols stops in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The non-effective lines include non-effective lines L6 and L9 set in the out-of-frame area shifted from the display screen G to the one symbol change destination side or the change base side, and effective lines L1 to L5 in the out-of-frame area and the display screen G Is set by ineffective lines L7, L8, L10, and L11 set so as to straddle an area set for the following (hereinafter, this area is also referred to as an in-frame area for comparison with an out-of-frame area). Specifically, the right ineffective line L6 is set in the out-of-frame region that is shifted from the right line L3 to one symbol variation base side (right side), and spans between the out-of-frame region and the in-frame region on the variation base side. Thus, a right lowering line L7 and a right right rising line L8 are set. Further, the left ineffective line L9 is set in the out-of-frame area shifted from the left line L1 to the one symbol variation destination side (left side), and spans the out-of-frame area and the in-frame area on the variation destination side. A left side lowering line L10 and a left side right rising line L11 are set. These non-effective lines L6 to L11 are lines used in the production of the pachinko machine 10, and the game result is notified by a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective lines L1 to L5.

  In this case, for example, even if the standby period elapses while the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11, the jackpot result does not occur. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 as described above, during this waiting period, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result stopped and displayed on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 moves to the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, a re-variation effect is set, which finally leads to the occurrence of the jackpot result.

  Hereinafter, the flow of the re-change effect will be illustrated with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. In FIG. 38, for the sake of convenience of explanation, symbols of portions that are not actually displayed in the left and right outside frame regions are also shown in a pseudo-displayed state.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, it is assumed that, as an ineffective line, for example, the variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the right ineffective line L6. Actually, only the part displayed in the display area of the display screen G can be visually recognized for each symbol stopped and displayed on the right ineffective line L6. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the combination of the specific symbols on the effective line passes through a turning effect as if the combination of the specific symbols stopped on the right ineffective line L6 changes again. (Middle line L2 in the figure). After that, it is clearly indicated that the waiting time has passed and the jackpot result is obtained, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In this pachinko machine 10, it is set so that the re-variation effect is performed once the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is temporarily stopped on the ineffective line in a part when the jackpot result occurs. Yes. In other words, the re-variation effect is generated with a predetermined probability when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on the ineffective line. As described above, a part of the symbols that stop in the out-of-frame area protrudes to the display area side of the display screen G, and the protruding part is allowed to be viewed by the player. For this reason, the player can recognize when the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the ineffective line by gazing at the protruding portion.

  As a player, it is expected that the above-described re-variation effect will be performed until the standby time elapses after the stop display is made (after the change display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is finished). By performing such a display effect, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result on the active line does not stop, the game round is finally ended (until the standby time elapses). It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the player may have won the jackpot, and to ensure the degree of attention to the game.

  Next, an outline of the reservation notice on the special figure side (prefetching effect) will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special figure holding advance notice indicating the content of the holding information stored in the holding ball storage area 232 is given at a timing before the start of the special figure game times related to the holding information. It is configured to be performed with probability. Therefore, the flow of the hold notice will be exemplified below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 39 and 40. In FIG. 40, for convenience of explanation, a part of a symbol that is not actually displayed in the left and right outside frame regions is also shown in a pseudo-displayed state.

  The special figure hold notice is made using the stop result (combination of stop symbols) in the special figure game times before the start of the special figure game times of the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice. Is called. Specifically, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is formed on the active line as a stop result of the special figure game times before the special figure game times related to the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice. In addition, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, thereby suggesting the content of the hold information that is the subject of the special symbol hold notice.

  For example, if the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice is any probable jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), the special figure of the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice is shown. In the special figure game times before the game times, the combination of the specific symbols is not stopped on the active line, and the same specific symbols are stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. End. In the following description, this stop mode is also referred to as a stop mode for special figure reservation notice.

  This special figure reservation notice is executed over a plurality of special figure game times in the special figure game times before the special figure game times of the target hold information. That is, as the special figure game times next to the special figure game times shown in FIG. 39 (a), as shown in FIG. 39 (b), from the special figure game times of the hold information that is the subject of the special figure hold notice. In the previous special figure game times, the special figure game times are ended in a stop mode of the hold notice with the specific symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the special figure game times subject to special figure hold notice, the combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line to end the special figure game times. The occurrence of a probable jackpot result is specified.

  Although the explanation by the figure is omitted, if the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice is a normal jackpot result, the special figure game before the special figure game times subject to the special figure hold notice At the time, the special figure game times are ended in a stop mode of the hold notice with non-specific symbols. After that, in the special figure game times of the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice, the combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line, the special figure game times are ended, and the occurrence of the normal jackpot result is clearly indicated The By doing in this way, the player grasps which jackpot result will be the special figure game times of the hold information that is the subject of the special figure hold notice from the contents of the special figure hold notice (stop result) It becomes possible to do.

  The special figure hold notice is executed with a predetermined probability in the hold information that is a jackpot result, and is also executed with a predetermined probability in the hold information that is a result of normal losing. In this case, because the hold information that is the subject of the special figure hold notice is a result of normal losing, when the special figure game times that are the subject of the special figure hold notice, the combination of specific symbols (non-specific symbols) The special figure game times are ended without stopping on the active line and without stopping and displaying the same specific symbol (non-specific symbol) on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  In this embodiment, a re-variation effect is also set for this special figure reservation notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 40A, for example, the change display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is performed in a state where the specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper stage of the right ineffective line L6 and the middle stage and the lower stage of the right line L3. Suppose it is finished. In this case, it can be said that the stop mode of the special figure reservation notice is formed over the in-frame region and the out-of-frame region. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the stoppage mode of the special figure reservation notice formed including the out-of-frame region is obtained through a turning effect as if each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 changes again. Move to the frame area. Thereby, the player can recognize that the stop mode of the special figure hold notice has become effective.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the stop mode of the special figure hold notice including the out-of-frame area is temporarily stopped in a part of the special figure game times in which the special figure hold notice is generated, and then the re-variation effect is performed. Is set to In other words, the above-described re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability when the stop mode of the special figure hold notice including the out-of-frame area is stopped and displayed. As described above, a part of the symbols that stop in the out-of-frame area protrudes to the display area side of the display screen G, and the protruding part is allowed to be viewed by the player. For this reason, the player can recognize when the stop mode of the special figure hold notice including the out-of-frame area is stopped and displayed by gazing at the protruding portion. In the following description, the stop mode of the special figure reservation notice including the out-of-frame area is also referred to as a special reservation notice stop mode.

  As described above, as a player, it is expected that the re-variation effect will be performed from the time when each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed until the standby time elapses. By performing such a display effect, even if the stop mode of the special figure hold notice is not stopped and displayed in the in-frame region, the special figure game times are finally ended (the waiting time elapses). Up to this point, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that a special figure hold notice may be established, and it is possible to suitably secure a degree of attention to the game.

  In the present embodiment, the re-change effect in the special figure reservation notice can be changed and displayed in different directions for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In other words, it is possible to perform re-variation effects for the number of different symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Therefore, for example, the symbol displayed in the left outside frame region and the symbol displayed in the right outside frame region can be changed again to the position of any one of the effective lines L1 to L5. . Therefore, in the special figure reservation advance notice, diversification of the stop mode of the special hold advance notice is achieved.

<About processing related to special effects on the special drawing side>
The processing related to various effects on the special drawing side will be described first, centering on the processing related to the re-changing effect, and then the processing related to the special drawing reservation notice will be described.

<Variable display control process performed by the production control device 82>
First, the variable display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. The variable display control process is started every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec). In the variation display control process, when the special diagram variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbols for one game, and the main control device When the special figure change end command transmitted from 81 is received, a process for displaying the change display of the symbol at the final stop is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process for appropriately correcting the variable display pattern is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the special figure reservation advance notice.

  In the variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, whether or not a special figure game is being played in step S2201, that is, whether or not the symbol display for one game is being displayed on the symbol display device 41. Determine whether or not. If the symbol variation display for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not a special diagram variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the special figure variation command has not been received, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. If the special figure change command is received, the special figure change start process is executed in step S2203, and then the fluctuation display control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the symbol variation display for one game is being performed, it is determined in step S2204 whether a special diagram variation end command transmitted from the main controller 81 has been received. If the special figure change end command has not been received, the special figure change middle process is executed in step S2205, and then the fluctuation display control process is ended. If the special figure change end command has been received, the special figure change end process is executed in step S2206, and then the fluctuation display control process ends.

  In the following, the special figure change start process in step S2203, the special figure change middle process in step S2205, and the special figure change end process in step S2206 will be described in detail.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process in step S2203 will be described. The special figure variation start process is a process for starting an effect for special figure game times based on the reception of the special figure variation command transmitted from the main control device 81. In the special figure change start process, in addition to the presence / absence of reach display as a special figure game turn effect, a re-variable effect and a special figure hold notice effect are set. Here, first, processing related to setting of reach display and setting of re-variable effect will be described, and thereafter processing related to setting of special figure holding notice effect will be described.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, in step S2301, the special figure change command received this time is read, and information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and information on the change display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the main controller 81 transmits a special figure change command, it also transmits a special figure type command. Therefore, in step S2301, the special figure type command received together with the special figure variation command received this time is read out, and the probability variation jackpot result information (2R explicit probability variation jackpot result, 2R implicit probability variation jackpot result and 15R The game result information such as the probability change jackpot result), the information of the normal jackpot result, the information of the special outage result or the information of the normal outage result is specified. In step S2301, from the above identified information, information on whether or not the jackpot is won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not reach occurs if the jackpot is not won, and the variable display time And the obtained information is stored in the first secondary execution area SAE1 in the storage area for holding 250 of the RAM 244.

  In subsequent step S2302, it is determined whether or not the game result of the special figure game times started this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result based on the information grasped in step S2301. If the result is a jackpot result, that is, if the result is a 2R explicit probability change jackpot result, a 2R non-explicit probability change jackpot result, a 15R probability change jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, then in step S2303, a jackpot effect setting process is executed.

  In the big hit effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, first, a big hit stop result determination process is executed in step S2401. In this stop result determination process, if the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (the main symbols to which odd numbers are attached) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is the current stop result. Determined as a stop result. In the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (the main symbols with an even number) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. . Further, in the case of 2R non-explicitly probable jackpot result or 2R explicit probable jackpot result, the stop result in which a predetermined symbol combination (for example, 3, 4, 1) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is displayed as the current stop. Determine as a result. The types of main symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when the jackpot result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, the last stop line table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and the address information, and the final line determined in step S2401. The stop line is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244. In step S2401, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area provided in the various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244 is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244, so the description is used.

  As already described, the reach display is executed in the game times in which the jackpot result occurs, and the variable display time is set longer in the super reach display than in the normal reach display. Therefore, in the subsequent step S2402, it is determined whether or not the variation display time is a variation display time corresponding to the normal reach display with reference to the variation display time of the game times executed this time.

  If it is determined in step S2402 that it is the variable display time corresponding to the super reach display instead of the normal reach display, after performing the effect pattern determination process for super reach in step S2403, the effect setting process for the main jackpot Exit.

  In the effect pattern determination process for super reach, the effect table for super reach stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 is acquired, and the variable display time and special figure type of the special figure change command received this time The effect pattern of the super reach display corresponding to the game result in the command is determined. Further, in step S2403, a process of storing the address information of the determined effect pattern in the pattern address storage area provided in the various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244 is executed. In the following description, in the various effect pattern determination processes, the corresponding effect table is acquired from the ROM 243, the effect patterns corresponding to the variable display time and the game result are determined, and the addresses of the effect patterns determined in the various effect pattern determination processes Since the information is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244, the description is incorporated.

  If it is the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display in step S2402, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, a re-variation effect lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a re-change effect. In this process, the re-variation effect lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the re-variation effect counter provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are acquired and the re-variation effect is executed. Whether or not to draw. In subsequent step S2405, it is determined whether or not the re-variation effect lottery is won based on the processing result in step S2404. By the way, in this embodiment, the probability of winning in the re-variation effect lottery process is 70%, and more than half of the special figure game times in which the normal reach display resulting in the jackpot result is selected are re-change effects. Changed to

  If the re-variation effect lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2406 to execute an effect pattern determination process for normal reach. After executing the process of step S2406, the big hit effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the re-variation effect lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, a process of rewriting the information stored in the RAM 244 in step S2301 as information indicating a special figure game time for performing a re-variation effect from a special figure game time having reached reach is executed.

  In subsequent step S2408, an effect pattern determining process for the re-change effect is executed, and in step S2409, a temporary stop line determining process in the re-change effect is executed. In this process, it is determined which of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is to temporarily stop the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result determined in step S2401. In other words, it is determined which of the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is used to execute the re-change effect. In this case, the effective line as the final stop line determined in step S2401 and the ineffective line as the temporary stop line determined in step S2409 are determined to be parallel.

  As shown in FIG. 44B, the re-variation table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 has address information of the ineffective lines L6 to 11 that are parallel to the effective lines L1 to L5. Is remembered. In step S2409, the temporary stop line is determined by referring to the address information of the final stop line stored in step S2401, and the temporary stop line provided in the various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244 is used as the temporary stop line address information. Store in the address storage area. In this way, the re-variation effect is an effect that translates the symbol combination that is stopped on the temporary stop line, thereby providing a smooth effect without changing the positional relationship between symbols constituting the symbol combination. can do.

  It should be noted that the relationship between the temporary stop line and the final stop line does not necessarily have to be parallel, and a configuration including those that are not parallel is also possible. In this case, in the re-variation effect between the non-parallel lines, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 do not move in parallel, and the symbols are again combined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained in the final stop line. It is necessary to variably display the columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, by using a configuration in which each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed, for example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result temporarily stops on the ineffective line and then changes again to the final stop line, the probability variation jackpot result It is good also as a structure which performs the display effect (what is called a promotion effect) finally stopped on an active line as a symbol combination corresponding to.

  After executing the process of step S2409, the process of storing the effect flag is executed in various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 in step S2410, and the out-of-frame flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 in step S2411. Execute the process. The roaring effect flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the roaring effect should be executed in this special figure game round. The out-of-frame flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to grasp that the re-variation effect should be executed in the current special figure game round (the symbol stopped in the out-of-frame area should be moved to the in-frame area). After performing the process of step S2411, the big hit effect setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 42), when it is determined in step S2302 that the result is not a big hit result, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. If reach occurs, the process advances to step S2305 to execute reach setting processing for reach generation.

  In the production setting process for generating reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the reach display generated in the current special figure game times is a normal reach display. If it is not the normal reach display but the super reach display, the process advances to step S2502 to execute a stop result determination process for super reach. The process in step S2502 is substantially similar to the process in step S2401. However, in the case of the processing performed in step S2502, since it corresponds to a miss reach, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the reach and reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, the same symbol combination is not formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that is the same as the symbol forming the reach line is set to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is performed at the stop position shifted by one line before or after one line. In step S2502, a process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

  In a succeeding step S2503, an effect pattern determination process for super reach is executed. In this case, similarly to step S2403, by referring to the super reach effect table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, it corresponds to the special figure change command and special figure type command received this time. Determine the content of the super reach display. After executing the process of step S2503, the reach setting process for generating reach is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S2501, if it is determined in step S2501 that the normal reach display is selected, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored in various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 when the notice condition is established in the special figure holding notice process described later. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, the special figure hold notice process in steps S2505 to S2510 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated. The processing for the special figure hold notice will be described in detail later. In this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the special figure hold notice in the special figure game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined. .

  If it is determined in step S2504 that the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2511. In step S2511, although the re-variation effect is not performed, it is ineffective whether or not to generate an ineffective uniform effect that stops the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 (although it does not become a jackpot result). A uniform production lottery process is executed. In the ineffective uniform effect lottery process, the non-effective uniform effect table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the values acquired from the ineffective uniform effect counters in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are referred to. It is determined whether or not an effective uniform effect is generated.

  In a succeeding step S2512, it is determined whether or not an ineffective uniform effect is generated based on the processing result in the step S2511. If an ineffective uniform effect is to be generated, the process proceeds to step S2513, and the information stored in the RAM 244 in step S2301 is rewritten as information that is a special figure game time for performing an invalid effective game from the special figure game time of reach. Execute the process.

  After executing the rewriting process in step S2513, the process proceeds to step S2514, and the stop result determination process for ineffective alignment is executed. In this process, it is determined whether to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in any of the ineffective lines L6 to L11. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result to be stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 and the ineffective lines L6 to L11 to be stopped are randomly determined by lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 46, in the stop result table for the ineffective uniform effect stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, the stop information in the ineffective uniform effect is based on the stop symbol of the middle line L2 that is the effective line. Address information is stored.

  In FIG. 46, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are shown for convenience by using intermediate numbers between the numbers assigned to the left and right main symbols. In step S2514, the stop symbol on the effective line is stored by comparing the symbol combination and ineffective line information determined in the above process with the ineffective alignment effect table.

  After executing the process of step S2514, an effect pattern determination process for ineffective alignment is executed in step S2515. In step S2516, after the process of storing the turn effect flag is executed, the effect setting process for generating the reach is terminated.

  If an ineffective uniform effect is not generated in step S2512, the process proceeds to step S2517. In step S2517, the stop mode of the special hold notice is formed in which the stop mode of the special figure hold notice is formed by the symbols that stop in the in-frame area and the out-of-frame area, but the ineffective notice effect that does not perform the re-variation effect is generated. Whether or not. In the invalid valid notice effect lottery process, the invalid valid notice effect table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 and the values acquired from the invalid valid notice effect counters in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 are referred to and It is determined whether or not an effective notice effect is generated.

  In a succeeding step S2518, it is determined whether or not an ineffective notice effect is generated based on the processing result in the step S2517. If an ineffective notice effect is not generated, the process advances to step S2519 to execute a stop result determination process for normal reach. The processing in step S2519 is substantially similar to the processing in step S2502. However, in Super Reach, the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol that forms the reach line, is finally stopped at a stop position that is shifted to the left or right by one line with respect to the reach line. Is not limited to one line, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined in correspondence with the variable display time determined by the main controller 81. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. After executing the process of step S2519, in step S2520, after performing the effect pattern determination process for normal reach, the effect setting process for generating this reach is terminated. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 may be determined randomly by lottery as long as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not obtained.

  If it is determined in step S2518 that an ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the ineffective notice effect process is executed in steps S2521 to S2525, and then the reach setting effect setting process is terminated. The process for the ineffective notice effect will be described in detail later. In this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective notice effect in the special game game times of the variable display time corresponding to the normal reach display are determined. .

  Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 42), if the reach does not occur in step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether a notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, an effect setting process for special figure hold notice is executed in step S2307, and if the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, an effect for normal departure is obtained in step S2308. Execute the setting process. Here, the normal setting effect setting process will be described, and the special figure holding notice effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the special setting reservation notice production setting process in step S2307, the special figure reservation notice stop result and the production pattern in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach does not occur are determined.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, in the normal setting effect setting process, first, ineffective step effect lottery processing is executed in step S2601. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S2511. However, it is won in the lottery effect lottery in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S2511 and the invalid lottery effect lottery in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S2601. The probabilities are different, and the probability of winning the ineffective uniform production is higher in step S2511 than in step S2601. More specifically, an ineffective uniform effect is generated with a probability of 10% in step S2511, and an ineffective uniform effect is generated with a probability of 1% in step S2601.

  In the subsequent step S2602, it is determined whether or not an ineffective uniform effect is generated based on the processing result in step S2601. If an ineffective uniform effect is to be generated, the process advances to step S2603 to execute a stop result determination process for ineffective uniform. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2514. After performing the process of step S2603, after performing the effect pattern determination process for non-valid alignment in step S2605, the effect setting process for normal removal ends. That is, since the variable display time is shorter than the time when the reach occurs, in the effect setting process for losing normally, even if a non-valid uniform effect is performed, the turn effect flag is not stored (the turn effect is not displayed). Not set).

  If it is determined in step S2602 that an ineffective uniform effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, a non-valid notice effect lottery process is executed. Such processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S2517. However, in the non-valid notice effect lottery in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach occurs in step S2517 and the invalid valid notice effect lotteries in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach does not occur in step S2605. The winning probabilities are different, and the probability of winning the ineffective notice effect in step S2517 is higher than that in step S2605. More specifically, in step S2517, an ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 15%, and in step S2605, an ineffective notice effect is generated with a probability of 3%.

  In subsequent step S2606, it is determined whether or not an ineffective notice effect is generated based on the processing result in step S2605. If the ineffective notice effect is not generated, the process proceeds to step S2607 to execute a stop result determination process for non-reach generation. In such a process, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination of the outreach reach symbols is not stopped, and further, on any of the ineffective lines L6 to L11. The stop result of this time is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not stopped, and the stop mode of the special reservation notice is not set. Thereafter, in step S2608, the effect pattern determination process for non-reach generation is executed, and then the effect setting process for losing normally ends.

  If it is determined in step S2606 that an ineffective notice effect is to be generated, the ineffective notice effect setting process is terminated after executing the ineffective notice effect process in steps S2609 to S2611. To do. The process for the ineffective notice effect will be described in detail later. In this process, the stop result and the effect pattern of the ineffective notice effect in the special figure game times of the variable display time when the reach is not generated are determined.

  Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 42), after executing any one of the processes in step S2303, step S2305, step S2307, and step S2308, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, a process including outputting the stop result and the command including information on the effect pattern determined in step S2303, step S2305, step S2307, or step S2308 to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command is executed. . Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control for executing an effect in the current special figure game times on the symbol display device 41.

  After executing the process of step S2309, in the subsequent step S2310, after executing the process of starting the effect for the special figure game times, the process for starting the special figure fluctuation is ended. Specifically, based on the effect pattern determined in step S2303, step S2305, step S2307, or step S2308, drive control of the speaker unit 64 and the display light emitting unit 63 is started, and an effect for special figure game times is provided. Start.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process in step S2205 in the changing display control process (FIG. 41) will be described. The special figure changing middle process is a process of executing or changing various effects in the special figure game times started by the special figure fluctuation starting process.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, in the special figure changing middle processing, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not an effect flag is stored in 247 in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. If the turn effect flag is stored, it is determined in step S2702 whether it is time to start the turn effect.

  Here, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 using the progress counters provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. Specifically, when the variable display is started, an elapsed counter update (addition) process is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). In addition, in the progress table provided in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, information on each counter value corresponding to the timing at which the turning effect is to be started, and information on the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the special figure game times They are stored in a one-to-one correspondence. In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is a counter value corresponding to the timing at which the turning effect is to be started in the current special figure game times progress table.

  Note that the processing timing (step S2704, step S2707, etc., which will be described later) for determining whether or not it is the execution timing of other effects in the special figure game times is also determined by referring to the progress table and the progress counter. To do.

  If it is determined in step S2702 that it is the start timing of the turn effect, a turn effect start command is output to the display control device 212 in step S2703. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control for causing the symbol display device 41 to perform a display for turning effect based on the received turning effect start command. As the turning effect on the display screen G, for example, an effect such as vibrating the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as to go back and forth between the change destination side and the change base side is set.

  If it is not time to execute the turn effect in step S2702, or after executing the process of step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the roaring effect. If it is time to end the turning effect in step S2704, a turning effect end command is output to the display control device 212 in step S2705. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes control to end the turning effect being executed on the display screen G with respect to the symbol display device 41 based on the received turning effect end command.

  If the turn effect flag is not stored in step S2701, if it is not the end timing of the turn effect in step S2704, or after executing the process of step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether or not an out-of-frame flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. As already described, the out-of-frame flag is a flag stored when the re-variation effect is executed.

  If the out-of-frame flag is stored, it is determined in step S2707 whether it is a re-variation timing. If it is determined that it is the re-variation timing, a re-variation command is output to the display control device 212 in step S2708. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes display control of the re-change effect on the symbol display device 41 based on the received re-change command.

  If the out-of-frame flag is not stored in step S2706, if it is not the re-variation timing in step S2707, or after executing the process of step S2708, the process proceeds to step S2709. Steps S2709 and S2710 are special figure reservation notice processing, and will be described later in detail.

<Special figure change end processing>
Next, the special figure change end process in step S2206 in the change display control process (FIG. 41) will be described. The special figure change end process is a process for ending a predetermined effect in the special figure game times started by the special figure change start process.

  In the special figure change ending process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, in step S2801, a fixed stop process is executed to make the special figure game times effect a fixed stop corresponding to the current game result. In this process, the speaker unit 64 and the display light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after the confirmation command is output to the display control device 212 in step S2802, the special figure variation end processing is ended. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

  As described above, the change display in each special figure game time becomes a final display corresponding to the game result based on the special figure change command output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82. Is implemented as follows. The re-variation effect is generated with a predetermined probability when the game result is any jackpot result. Further, even if the game result is a disapproval result, an effect as if a re-variation effect occurs with a predetermined probability, that is, an ineffective uniform effect occurs.

<Explanation of processing related to special figure hold notice>
Next, processing related to the special figure reservation notice will be described.

<Processing performed by main controller 81>
As a process related to the special figure reservation notice, a process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a process executed by the effect control device 82 are set. Therefore, the process on the main control device 81 side will be described first, and then the process on the effect control device 82 side will be described.

<Confirmation process for special figure hold>
First, the confirmation process for special figure holding executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the confirmation process for holding the special figure is a process executed in step S405 of the winning process for the operating port of the timer interrupt process.

  In the confirmation process for special figure hold, in step S2901, the information on the number of holds stored in the hold ball storage area 232 is read, and the information on the number of hold is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the subsequent step S2902, information for jackpot determination out of the hold information acquired in the information acquisition process in the winning process for the operating opening based on the current winning for the operating openings 33 and 34, that is, the information latched from the jackpot random number counter C1. To figure out.

  In the subsequent step S2903, it is determined whether or not the current winning lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S2904, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S2902 is set as the jackpot winning with reference to the winning table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. That it is included in the information. In the case of the high probability mode, in step S2905, with reference to the high probability mode win / loss table shown in FIG. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S2904 or step S2905, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information grasped in step S2902 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it is determined that it corresponds to the jackpot winning, in step S2907, information for determining the type of the hold information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winning of the operating ports 33, 34, that is, the jackpot type The latched information is grasped from the counter C2.

  In subsequent step S2908, with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the information for determining the jackpot type determined in step S2907 is information set as a normal jackpot result or any one of them Which of the information set as the probability variation jackpot result is specified. Thereafter, in step S2909, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type information grasped in step S2907 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2910, and if it corresponds to any probability variation jackpot result, in step S2911, the MPU 202 Stores probable jackpot information in a register.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2906, if the process of step S2910 is executed, or if the process of step S2911 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, the information on the reach reach determination, that is, the information latched from the reach random number counter C3 is grasped among the hold information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winnings to the operation ports 33 and 34.

  In subsequent step S2913, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of ROM 203 is referred to, and the reach grasped in step S2912 is determined. It is specified whether the information for determination is included in the information set as the reach winning. Thereafter, in step S2914, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S2912 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S2915, the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and then this confirmation process is terminated. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the special figure hold command setting process of step S406 in the winning process for the operation opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure hold command setting process, it is determined in step S3001 whether the normal jackpot information or the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, thereby confirming the immediately preceding special figure hold confirmation process. It is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information is identified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. In the case where either the normal jackpot information or the probability variation jackpot information is stored, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not it is the probability variation jackpot information, so that in the confirmation processing for the immediately preceding special figure suspension. It is determined whether or not the information for type determination is specified as corresponding to any probability variation jackpot result.

  If it is probability variation jackpot information, a probability variation corresponding hold command is set in step S3003, and if it is normal jackpot information, a normal correspondence hold command is set in step S3004. Note that the setting of the command and various commands described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3001 that both the normal jackpot information and the probability variation jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S3005 to determine whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. Thus, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation processing for holding the special figure immediately before. If the reach occurrence information is stored, a detach reach hold command is set in step S3006. If no reach occurrence information is stored, a complete detach hold command is set in step S3007. To do.

  After executing any of the processes in steps S3003, S3004, S3006, and S3007, in step S3008, a process of setting the number of hold information for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set. In this case, in step S3008, the information on the number of holdings stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2901 in the immediately preceding special figure holding confirmation process is read, and then the number of holdings in the holding command that has already been set. For the information bits, the read information on the number of reserved bits is stored by an arithmetic process such as logical sum. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any one of the processes of step S3003, step S3004, step S3006, or step S3007, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Information for is included.

  After executing the process of step S3008, the setting process is terminated. The hold command including the hold number information in step S3008 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 by the external output process in the next normal process. The effect control device 82 receives the hold command and specifies that the hold information has increased.

  In addition, with respect to the setting method of the hold command, the presence control unit 82 specifies whether or not the jackpot is won, if the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot at that time, and the presence or absence of reach if the jackpot is not won If it is possible, it is arbitrary. For example, a combination of a probability change corresponding hold command, a normal support hold command, a release reach support hold command, and a complete release support hold command is individually set corresponding to each hold number, and in the special figure hold command setting process, A configuration may be adopted in which one pending command is selected according to the confirmation result in the confirmation processing for special figure suspension.

  In addition, instead of a configuration in which information about game results, information about the number of holds, and information about the variable display time are set in the hold command, information on the game results and the variable display time itself are set to values such as counters C1, C2, C3, CS1, etc. It is good also as a structure which sets. However, as described above, the configuration in which the information of the game result itself is set is the value of each counter C1, C2, C3, CS from the command input / output between the main control device 81 and the effect control device 82. It is preferable from the viewpoint that it is possible to suppress fraud that can be read. The same applies to other commands input / output between the main control device 81 on the main side and the production control device 82 on the sub side. Information set based on the counter value, not the counter value itself. May be set to these commands. Even if these commands are configured to output the value of the random number counter on the main side involved in the player's profit to the sub side, there is a possibility that the random number update timing is grasped and fraudulent acts may be performed. is there.

<Regarding the special figure hold control process executed by the production control device 82>
Next, the special figure hold control process executed by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special figure hold control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252 and is activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

  First, in step S 3101, it is determined whether or not any hold command for special figure has been received from the main control device 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, a special figure hold notice setting process is executed as a process corresponding to the received hold command in step S3102. The special figure hold advance notice setting process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S3103, 1 is added to the secondary-side reserved storage number SN stored in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. In step S3103, processing corresponding to the increase in the number of reserved memories (for example, processing for controlling the emission of the on-hold light emitting units 45 and 46 or changing the on-hold information displayed on the display screen G) is executed. Further, in step S3103, processing for storing the hold information of the received hold command in the RAM 244 is executed. As described above, the RAM 244 is provided with the storage area 250 for storing the storage information, and the storage area 250 for storage has the first secondary storage area 250a and the second secondary storage area 250b. It has been. In step S3103, it is determined whether the special command hold command received this time is a command related to hold information corresponding to which area 250a, 250b. Then, the information included in the hold command is stored in the area with the smallest number (the area that is the target of the determination of the success / failure) among the empty areas of the first area to the fourth area in the areas 250a and 250b to be stored. As already described, the information included in the hold command includes game result information, information on whether or not reach display has occurred, and information on reach type (information on variable display time) when reach display occurs. ,It is included. In step S3103, processing for storing these pieces of information in the corresponding areas is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3101 or after execution of step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104 to determine whether a special figure shift command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, the sub-hold storage number SN is decremented by 1 in step S3105. In step S3105, processing corresponding to the decrease in the number of reserved memories (for example, processing for controlling the emission of the on-hold light emitting units 45 and 46 or changing the on-hold information displayed on the display screen G) is executed. In step S3105, a shift process is executed. In this shift process, the hold information set in each area of the hold storage area 250 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the special figure shift command received this time is specified as which special figure shift command corresponds to which area 250a, 250b. In addition, the hold information of the first area in the areas 250a and 250b to be shifted is cleared, and the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, etc. Shift hold display information for. When a negative determination is made in step S3104 or after execution of the process of step S3105, the special figure hold control process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53, the special figure hold notice setting process in step S3102 will be described.

  In the special figure hold advance notice setting process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the secondary hold storage number SN is equal to or greater than “1”. If the secondary reserved storage number SN is “0”, it is determined in the subsequent step S3202 whether or not the special figure game times are currently being executed. This is a case where the secondary-side reserved storage number SN is “1” or more in step S3201, and there is hold information that has not started the special figure game times when the current hold command is received, or in step S3202. If the special-purpose game number is currently being executed even if the secondary-side reserved storage number SN is “0”, the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3203, it is determined whether a winning flag is stored in various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The winning flag is a flag stored in step S3206, which will be described later, when a probability change corresponding pending command or a normal corresponding pending command is received, and is executed before the special game time corresponding to the currently received pending command This is a flag for the MPU 202 to specify that any jackpot result will occur in the special figure game times.

  If it is determined that the winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3204, and it is determined whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The notice condition establishment flag is a flag stored when the notice condition is established as described above. More specifically, in the jackpot notice setting process (step S3207) or the losing notice setting process (step S3208) described later. The flag to be stored.

  If it is determined that the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, it is determined in step S3205 whether the hold command received this time is a probability change support hold command or a normal support hold command. If the command is a hold command corresponding to these jackpot results, a process for storing a winning flag is executed in subsequent step S3206, and then a jackpot notice setting process is executed in step S3207. Also, if the received hold command is not a hold command corresponding to the jackpot result in step S3205, that is, if it is a release command corresponding to outreach or a hold command corresponding to complete outage, an advance notice for release in step S3208. Execute the setting process.

  If it is determined in step S3202 that the special figure game times are not being executed, if it is determined in step S3203 that a winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S3204 that a notice condition establishment flag is stored. In this case, or after executing any one of steps S3207 and S3208, the special figure hold notice setting process is terminated.

  Here, the jackpot notice setting process of step S3207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the jackpot notice setting process, first, in step S3301, a jackpot holding notice lottery process is executed. In such processing, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the special figure hold notice in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, the special notice hold notice is executed with reference to the value of the hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 and the big hit hold notice lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243. A lottery to determine whether or not to do. In the jackpot reservation lottery table for jackpots in this embodiment, the probability of winning the hold notice lottery is set to 75%, and more than half of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is set to win the hold notice lottery. Has been.

  In the subsequent step S3302, it is determined whether or not the pending notice lottery is won based on the processing result in step S3301. If the pending notice lottery has not been won, the jackpot notice setting process is terminated. If the holding notice lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S3303.

  In step S3303, it is determined whether or not the currently received hold command is a normal correspondence hold command. If it is a normal handling pending command, processing for grasping a notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed in step S3304. The notice symbol indicates a common symbol that is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the special figure reservation notice. In such processing, a non-specific symbol (even number symbol) is grasped as a notice symbol as a notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3303 that the command is not a regular response pending command but a probability variation correspondence pending command, in step S3305, a process of grasping a notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed. In this process, the specific symbol (the main symbol to which an odd number is attached) is grasped as the notice symbol as the notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

  After performing the process of step S3304 or step S3305, the process proceeds to step S3306. In step S3306, a process of storing the notice symbol grasped in step S3304 or step S3305 in the notice symbol address storage area provided in the various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244 is executed. In step S3307, a process for storing a notice condition establishment flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the big hit notice setting process is terminated.

  Next, the removal notice setting process in step S3208 of the special figure reservation notice setting process (FIG. 53) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the release notice setting process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the currently received hold command is a release reach compatible hold command. When the command received this time is not a release reach correspondence hold command but a complete release support hold command, the previous release notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3401 that the command is a detach reach hold command, detach hold notice lottery processing is executed in step S3402. In such processing, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the special figure hold notice in the hold information corresponding to the hold command received this time. Specifically, with reference to the value of the hold notice lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 and the hold notice lottery table for removal from the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, is the special figure hold notice executed? A lottery of no. In the off-holding advance notice lottery table of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the on-hold advance notice lottery is set to 10%, which is set lower than the jackpot notice lottery process.

  In the subsequent step S3403, it is determined whether or not the pending notice lottery is won based on the processing result in step S3402. If it is determined that the pending notice lottery has not been won, the outlier notice setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pending notice lottery is won, the process advances to step S3404.

  In step S3404, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to the detachment reach is executed. In this process, the symbol that forms the reach line when the reach display is executed in the special game game of the hold information that is triggered by the hold command is specified based on the received hold command corresponding to the outreach. If the symbol that forms this reach line is a specific symbol, the symbol for the notice corresponding to the detachment reach is determined as the specific symbol, and if the symbol that forms the reach line is a non-specific symbol, the symbol for the notice corresponding to the detachment reach is determined. The symbol is determined as a non-specific symbol.

  Then, in step S3405, a process for storing the notice symbol based on the process result in step S3404 in the corresponding area of the storage area for holding 250 is executed, and in step S3406, the notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. The off-track notice setting process is terminated.

  That is, in the jackpot notice setting process (step S3207) or the off notice notice setting process (step S3208) of the hold notice setting process, it is determined whether or not to perform the special figure hold notice based on the received special figure hold command. When a special figure hold notice is made, a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. And, by storing this notice condition establishment flag, the special figure hold notice effect is controlled to be changed in the special figure game times executed before the special figure game times subject to the special figure hold notice. It is set in the process (FIG. 41).

  As already described, as an effect for the special figure reservation notice, an effect performed using each symbol that stops on the effective lines L1 to L5 and a symbol that stops on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 on the premise of the re-variation effect are also used. The effect to be performed (that is, the effect of performing the re-change effect after the stop mode of the special reservation notice is stopped) is set. In the following description, an effect performed using the symbols stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5 is also referred to as a first special figure reservation notice, and an effect performed using the symbols stopped on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 is the second. It is also called a special figure hold notice. In the second special figure reservation notice, there are set an effect accompanied by a turn effect and an effect not accompanied by a turn effect. In this second special figure reservation notice, whether there is a turn or no turn is set by the difference in the fluctuation display time of the special figure game times. Specifically, when the fluctuation display time for non-reach occurrence is set as the fluctuation display time of the special figure game times, which is shorter than that at the time of the reach occurrence, the second special figure hold advance notice without the roaring effect is executed. When the variable display time is set when the reach is longer than that (when the normal reach is generated), the second special figure holding advance notice with the turning effect is executed.

  In this way, in order to determine whether or not to execute the turning effect in the second special figure reservation notice from the difference in the variable display time, in the special figure change start process of the variable display control process, the second special that is not accompanied by the turning effect. The figure hold advance notice is set in the effect setting process (step S2307) for the special figure hold advance notice when the reach is not generated (step S2304: NO), and the second special figure hold advance notice with the turn effect is set for producing the reach. It is set in the process (step S2305). Here, the setting of the normal first special figure reservation advance notice will be described first, and thereafter, the setting of each second special figure reservation advance notice with / without a turning effect will be described.

  In the special setting reservation notice production setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, a revariation production lottery process is executed in step S3501. In this process, the value of the lottery counter for the re-variation effect in the special figure hold notice acquired from the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 and the re-change effect in the special figure hold notice stored in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 are used. With reference to the lottery table, it is determined whether or not the re-variation effect is executed in the special figure reservation notice, that is, whether the first special figure reservation notice or the second special figure reservation notice is executed. The lottery table for the re-variation effect includes a lottery table for the jackpot result and a lottery table for the off-result, and the corresponding lottery table is acquired based on the hold information subject to the special figure hold notice. . Then, using the lottery table and the lottery counter, it is determined whether to execute the first special figure reservation notice or the second special figure reservation notice.

  In addition, the probability that the lottery table for jackpot results will be the second special figure reservation notice is set higher than the lottery table for outlier results, and in this embodiment, 70% in the lottery table for jackpot results The second special figure hold notice (30% becomes the first special figure hold notice), and 10% becomes the second special figure hold notice (90% is the first special figure hold notice) Is set).

  In a succeeding step S3502, it is determined whether or not the re-variation effect is executed based on the processing result in the step S3501. When the first special figure reservation notice is executed without executing the re-variation effect, a stop result determination process for the first special figure reservation notice is executed in the following step S3503. In this stop result setting process, it is determined whether the notice symbol information stored in step S3306 or step S3405 is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is selected based on the grasped information. It is determined whether to stop all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, a stop result table for the first special figure reservation notice corresponding to the decided symbol is read from the ROM 243, and a symbol combination to be stopped on the active lines L1 to L5 in the normal hold notice is determined.

  Here, the normal suspension notice stop result table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57A illustrates the stop result table in the middle line L2 when the number assigned to the notice corresponding symbol is “7”. Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the sub symbol arranged between the main symbols is conveniently indicated by using a middle number between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. As a specific example of the stop result, the stop result of the address information D (1) is shown in a simplified manner.

  In the stop result table for the first special figure reservation notice, a plurality of stop results for stopping the same main symbol are set in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 according to the symbol combinations to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5, respectively. Information of the stop result is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbol does not stop in any effective line L1 to L5, and the same main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 in any effective line L1 to L5. Is set so that no reach line is formed. For example, when the address information D (1) is selected and the notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper stage of the middle line L2 and the middle stage and the lower stage of the right line L3, “7 The symbol combinations to be stopped are set in the order of a main symbol with “,” a sub symbol between “6” and “7”, and a sub symbol between “6” and “7”.

  As the types of stop results of the first special figure reservation notice, the same main symbols are stopped on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (3 × 3 × 3 = 27), and the same on the effective lines L1 to L5. This is the number excluding the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the main symbols are aligned and stopped, and the symbol combination (5 lines × 2 types) that is out of reach, specifically 27-5. -10 = 12 types.

  Returning to the description of the special setting reservation notice production setting process (FIG. 56), in the stop result determination process in step S3503, one stop result is determined from the stop result table for the first special figure reservation notice and its address is set. Information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244. In subsequent step S3504, an effect pattern determination process for the first special figure reservation notice is executed. The stop result determined in step S3503 and the effect pattern determined in step S3504 are output to the display control device 212 as a stop result command and a pattern command in step S2309 of the special figure variation start process. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the first special figure reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  When it is determined in step S3502 that the re-variation effect is to be executed and the second special figure reservation notice is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S3505. In steps S3505 to S3507, a process for setting the second special figure holding notice without turning is performed. Specifically, in step S3505, a stop result setting process for second special figure hold notice is executed. In this stop result setting process, it is determined whether the notice symbol information stored in step S3306 or step S3405 is a non-specific symbol or a specific symbol, and which symbol is selected based on the grasped information. Decide whether to use a notice-compatible design. Then, a stop result table for the second special figure holding notice corresponding to the decided notice corresponding symbol is read from the ROM 243, and the symbol combination to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5 in the second special figure holding notice is determined.

  Here, the stop result table for the second special figure reservation notice will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57B illustrates the stop result table in the middle line L2 when the number assigned to the notice corresponding symbol is “7”. Further, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the sub symbol arranged between the main symbols is conveniently indicated by using a middle number between the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. As a specific example of the stop symbol, the stop result of the address information E (3) is shown in a simplified manner.

  In the stop result table for the second special figure reservation notice, a plurality of stop results for stopping the same main symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the out-of-frame region are set by the symbol combination to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5. Each stop result information is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbols do not stop at any valid line L1 to L5 and non-valid lines L6 to L11, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row also on any valid line L1 to L5. In Z3, a reach line is not formed by the same main symbol. For example, when the address information E (3) is selected and the notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper part of the middle line L2, the middle part of the right ineffective line L6, and the lower part of the left line L1, the address information E (3) is placed on the middle line L2. From the top, a symbol combination that stops in the order of a main symbol with “7”, a main symbol with “6”, and a sub-symbol between “7” and “8” is set.

  As the types of stop results of the second special figure reservation notice, all types (5 × 5 × 5) that stop the same main symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the ineffective lines L6 to L11 in the out-of-frame area. = 125), the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same main symbols are stopped in the effective lines L1 to L5 and the ineffective in which the same main symbols are stopped in the ineffective lines L6 to L11 This is the number excluding the matched symbol combination (6), the unreachable symbol combination (5 lines x 4 types), and the symbol combination (12) of the normal hold notice. 125-5-6-20-12 = 82 types.

  In the second special figure reservation advance notice, the special figure hold advance notice is performed using the symbols that stop on the ineffective lines L6 to L11 in addition to the symbols that stop on the active lines L1 to L5. As a result, the types of stop results are increasing. Therefore, the number of items in the special figure reservation notice becomes various, and the diversification of the production is realized.

  Returning to the description setting process (FIG. 56) for the special figure hold notice, in the stop result determination process in step S3505, one stop result is decided from the stop result table for the second special figure hold notice and its address is set. Information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244. In subsequent step S3506, an effect pattern determination process for second special figure reservation notice is executed.

  The stop result determined in step S3505 and the effect pattern determined in step S3506 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S2309 of the variation start process. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the second special figure reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at a predetermined display position in the display screen G.

  After executing the process of step S3506, a process of storing an out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3507. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706 in the mid-variation process (FIG. 48), and a re-variation effect can be performed.

  After executing the process of step S3504 or step S3507, the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3508, and then the special figure holding notice effect setting process is terminated. The notice execution flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that the notice condition is satisfied and the special figure game times for executing any special figure hold notice are executed.

  Next, the process regarding the setting of the second special figure reservation advance notice accompanied with the roaring effect will be described. This process is performed in the reach setting process (FIG. 45) for reach generation in the special figure change start process.

  Referring again to FIG. 45, the special figure game times starting from now are special figure game times corresponding to the occurrence of reach, and the reach mode is normal reach display (step S2501: YES), If the notice condition establishment flag is stored (step S2504: YES), the process proceeds to step S2505. In step S2505, a process of rewriting the information stored in the RAM 244 in step S2301 in the special figure variation start process from the game time of reach occurrence to the game time in which the second special figure holding notice with a fly effect is performed is executed. .

  In subsequent step S2506, a stop result determination process for second special figure reservation notice is executed, and in step S2507, an effect pattern determination process for second special figure reservation notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S3505 and S3506. The stop result determined in step S2506 and the effect pattern determined in step S2507 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S2309 of the variation start process. The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 so as to execute an effect corresponding to the second special figure reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  In subsequent step S2508, processing for storing an out-of-frame flag in RAM 244 is executed, and in step S2509, processing for storing an effect flag in RAM 244 is executed. As a result, in the special-fluctuation changing process, an affirmative determination is made in step S2701 and a process for turning effect is performed, and an affirmative determination is performed in step S2708 and a process for re-changing effect is performed. In step S2510, a process for storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for generating reach is terminated.

  In other words, when setting the second special figure hold notice without a turn effect, the turn effect flag is not stored, and when the second special figure hold notice with a turn effect, the turn effect flag is stored. The processing configuration is the same for the stop result determination process and the effect pattern determination process other than.

  Further, in the effect setting process for generating reach, the stop result is the same as that in the case of the second special figure hold notice, but the process related to the ineffective notice effect without performing the re-variation effect is also performed. This process is performed in steps S2521 to S2525 when the ineffective notice lottery process in step S2517 is won (step S2518: YES).

  That is, in step S2521, a process of rewriting the information stored in the RAM 244 in step S2301 in the variation start process from a game time in which a reach has occurred to a game time in which a second special figure hold notice effect is performed. Incidentally, as described above, in the special figure game times, the ineffective notice effect is performed instead of the special figure hold notice effect, but in the second special figure hold notice and the ineffective notice effect, the symbol stop result and the effect pattern are the same. The only difference is whether or not the re-variation effect is performed. For this reason, in step S2521, first, the special figure game times for performing the second special figure reservation notice effect are stored as the special figure game times. By doing in this way, the kind of information of special figure game times memorize | stored is reduced, and reduction of a storage capacity is aimed at.

  In subsequent step S2522, a stop result setting process for second special figure reservation notice is executed, and in step S2523, an effect pattern determination process for second special figure reservation notice is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in steps S2506, S3506, S2507, and S3507. The stop result determined in step S2522 and the effect pattern determined in step S2523 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S2309 of the variation start process. Then, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 so as to execute a variable display corresponding to the second special figure reservation notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. However, since the out-of-frame flag is not stored in the above process, the effect executed as described above is not the second special figure holding notice effect but the ineffective notice effect.

  In step S2524, a process of storing an ineffective notice flag in various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is executed. The non-valid advance notice flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to recognize that it is a game time in which an invalid notice effect is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2525, a process of storing an effect flag in the RAM 244 is executed. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2701 in the special figure fluctuation mid-use process, and a process for turning effect is performed. After the process of step S2525 is executed, the effect setting process for generating reach is terminated.

  Further, the above-mentioned ineffective notice effect may not be accompanied by a sword effect. This is set in the effect setting process (step S2308) for normal deviation in the special figure variation start process. Such processing will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the ineffective notice effect is won in the ineffective notice lottery process performed in step S2605 (step S2606: YES), the process proceeds to step S2609. In step S2609, a process of storing an ineffective notice effect in the RAM 244 as an effect of the current special figure game times is executed. In step S2609, a stop result setting process for second special figure reservation notice is executed. In step S2610, an effect pattern determination process for second special figure reservation notice is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in step S2506, step S2522, and step S3505, step S2507, step S2523, and step S3506. The stop result determined in step S2609 and the effect pattern determined in step S2610 are output to the display control device 212 as a pattern command and a stop result command in step S2309 of the variation start process.

  The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control so that the symbol display device 41 executes variable display corresponding to the special hold notice. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the notice symbols are stopped and displayed at the predetermined display position on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. However, since the out-of-frame flag is not stored in the above process, the effect is not the second special figure hold notice effect but the ineffective notice effect.

  That is, the stop result is the same as that of the second special figure hold notice in the non-valid notice effect (that is, the special hold notice stop mode), and the non-valid notice effect and the second special figure hold notice effect are present or not. The only difference is the production pattern. In this way, while sharing the contents of the stop result on the display screen G, the effect (whether it becomes the second special figure hold notice effect or the ineffective notice effect) is made different by the re-variation effect. Both diversification and simplification of processing for variable display are achieved.

  After executing the process of step S2610, in step S2611, the process of storing the ineffective notice flag in the RAM 244 is executed, and then the effect setting process for losing normally ends.

  As described above, at the start of each special figure game time, the stop result and the variation pattern on the display screen G are determined, and the effect of each special figure game time is performed. Here, there is a case where a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs at the timing when the special figure game times are produced, and the hold information based on the winning is subject to the special figure hold notice. In this case, in the present embodiment, a process for performing a special figure holding advance notice is performed in the special figure game times being executed. Hereinafter, this process will be described.

  This process is performed in step S2709 and step S2710 of the special figure fluctuation intermediate process. Referring to FIG. 48 again, in step S2709, it is determined whether or not the advance execution flag is stored in the RAM 244 even though the advance condition establishment flag is stored in the RAM 244. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, as described above, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the special figure change start process in the situation where the notice condition establishment flag is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the notice execution flag is not stored even though the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored is that after the special figure change start process is executed, that is, the change display of the symbol in one game round starts. After that, it means that a new prize is generated for the operation ports 33 and 34, and a condition for executing the special figure hold notice is established for the hold information acquired based on the win.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, the replacement process is executed in step S2710, and then the special figure variation in-process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2709, the special figure variation intermediate processing is terminated as it is.

  Here, the replacement process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the replacement process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not an invalid notice flag is stored. If it is determined that the invalid notice flag is stored, the invalid notice flag is deleted in the following step S3602. In step S3603, the out-of-frame flag is stored in the RAM 244. In step S3603, the notice execution flag is stored in the RAM 244. Then, the replacement process is terminated.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when a non-valid notice effect in which a re-variation effect is performed is set although the second special figure hold notice and the stop result are the same at the start of the special figure game times, the ineffective notice effect is set. The notice effect is changed to the second special figure reservation notice in which the re-variation effect is performed. In this case, it is not necessary to correct the stop symbol, and a local increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the ineffective notice flag is not stored in step S3601, the stop result correcting process is executed in step S3605, and then the replacement process is terminated.

  Here, the stop result correction process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the stop result correction process, it is first determined in step S3701 whether or not the special figure game times being executed are special figure game times corresponding to the super reach display. When it is determined that the special figure game times correspond to the super reach display, the stop symbol correction process is terminated as it is. That is, in the case of the super reach display, even if the notice condition is satisfied, the special figure hold notice is not performed and the super reach display is performed as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the special figure game times corresponding to the super reach display, the information of the notice symbol is read from the RAM 244 in step S3702. In step S3703, it is determined whether or not all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  36, the symbol variation display in the pachinko machine 10 will be described again with reference to FIG. 36. When the symbol variation display is performed in the symbol display device 41, first, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. The high-speed fluctuation display (or the first speed display) is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all of the symbol rows becomes impossible or difficult in appearance. Thereafter, as the period T1 elapses from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 36A, first, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1. Is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display) so that the appearance becomes easy, and the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed when the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. The fluctuation display at is stopped. In addition, when the period of T2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), each of the lower symbol row Z3 displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed. The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the identification of the symbols is easy in appearance, and the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped when the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Further, when the period of T3 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in this way, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), in the middle symbol row Z2, each displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols can be easily identified. Then, when the period T4 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  In the above configuration, the periods T1, T2, T3, and T4 are determined according to various effect tables stored in the ROM 243, more specifically, in a one-to-one correspondence with various effect patterns. Then, the reach effect or the like is performed after the period T3 has elapsed and until the period T4 has elapsed.

  Note that it is not essential that the timing at which the symbol variation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the symbol variation display speed in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched at the same time. Good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing at which the symbol variation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the symbol variation display speed in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched are not simultaneous, and the timings of both are shifted. Also good. The T1, T2, and T3 are in a one-to-one correspondence with the number of holding information stored at the start of the game round, more specifically, according to the number of holding information stored at the start of the special figure gaming round. It is good also as a structure defined correspondingly. Furthermore, when the number of pieces of holding information stored at the start of the special figure game times is the maximum number of holdings, any of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to “0”.

  As already described, the MPU 242 measures the time from the start of the symbol variable display on the symbol display device 41 using the progress counter provided in the RAM 244. In addition, in the progress table provided in the ROM 243, information on each counter value corresponding to the above T1, T2, T3 is associated one-to-one with information on the effect pattern that can be set at the start of the special figure game times. It is memorized in the state. In step S3703, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T1 in the progress table, so that all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 change at high speed. It is determined whether it is in the middle.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, when it is determined in step S3703 that all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the first correction process is executed in step S3704 and then the final stop result correction is performed. The process ends. If all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed in step S3703, that is, after the period T1 has elapsed, whether or not the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed in step S3705. Determine whether. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the progress table. If the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, that is, before the period T2 has elapsed, the second correction process is executed in step S3706, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. If the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed in step S3705, that is, after the period T2 has elapsed, whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed is determined in step S3707. judge. In this processing, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current progress counter is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the progress table. When the middle symbol sequence Z2 is changing at high speed, that is, before the period of T3 has elapsed, the third correction process is executed in step S3708, and then the stop result correction process is terminated. If the middle symbol row Z2 is not changing at high speed in step S3707, that is, if the period T3 has elapsed, the stop result is not corrected and the stop result correcting process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the first correction process in step S3704, the second correction process in step S3706, and the third correction process in step S3708 will be described.

  In the first correction process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 60, the re-variation effect lottery process is executed in step S3801, and it is determined whether or not the lottery is won in step S3802. The processing of step S3801 and step S3802 is the same as the processing of step S3501 and step S3502 in the effect setting processing for special figure reservation notice. If the re-variation effect is won in step S3805, processing for storing an out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3803. As a result, in the special drawing variation middle processing after the next time, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, and the processing for revariation effect is performed.

  In a succeeding step S3804, it is determined whether or not the special figure game time being executed is a game time corresponding to the normal reach display. In the case of the normal reach display, a process of storing a turn flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3805. Thus, an affirmative determination is made in step S2701 in the special figure changing middle processing after the next time.

  If the re-variation effect is not won in step S3802, the normal reach display is not performed in step S3804 (the reach is not generated), or after the process of step S3805 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3806. In step S3806, the ROM 243 refers to the first stage correction table as the first stage correction information group. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the first stage correction table is a pair for any combination of the information on the initial performance pattern and the information on the notice symbol except when the super reach display occurs. 1, the information of the first correction effect pattern is set, and the address information is set corresponding to the information of the first correction effect pattern. In this case, all the information on the effect pattern for the first correction is set as information on the effect pattern after the period T1 has elapsed from the start of the change. However, the information of each first modification effect pattern is set so as not to change the variable display time in the effect pattern that was initially set.

  By the way, in the first stage correction table, the information of each production pattern of the first special figure reservation notice and the second special figure reservation notice is set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, the effect pattern to be referred to is different between the case where the re-variation effect is won in step S3802 and the case where it is not won.

  In subsequent step S3807, address information for first correction corresponding to the combination of the type information of the notice symbol specified in step S3702 and the information of the effect pattern being executed stored in various address storage areas 246. (First correction information) is specified from the first stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area provided in the various address storage areas 246 of the RAM 244.

  By storing the first correction address information in the correction address storage area, the MPU 242 determines that the period T1 has elapsed from the start of the change based on the information of the progress counter, and then sets the currently set first information. The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are driven and controlled so as to perform an effect corresponding to the information of the effect pattern for one correction.

  In step S3808, a correction command including the first correction address information stored in step S3807 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the first correction address information in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. Further, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the first stage correction table shown in FIG. Then, the first correction variation display pattern is specified from the first correction address information, and the symbol variation display is executed using the variation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the symbols for notice are stopped and displayed at predetermined positions on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the process of step S3808, the process of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3809, and then the first correction process is terminated.

  Next, the second correction process in step S3706 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the second correction process, first, in step S3901, information on the stopped symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 in the effective lines L1 to L5 is grasped based on the information stored in the various address storage areas 246. In this case, there is a case where there are one main symbol and two cases as the type information of the stop symbol, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined. Both of them are specified as symbols to be determined.

  In a succeeding step S3902, it is determined whether or not the first correction condition is established for the determination target symbol specified in the step S3901. The first correction condition is that when the information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol to which an odd number is added, if the determination target symbol is a specific symbol, the first correction condition is satisfied. When it is set so as to be determined and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the first is determined when the symbol to be determined is a non-specific symbol. It is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined that the first correction condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3903, and the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped in the out-of-frame area (ineffective lines L6 to L11) based on the information stored in the various address storage areas 246. Grasp information on symbols. In this case, as stop symbol type information, there are a case where there are 0 main symbols and a case where there are 2 symbols. In the case of, both of them are specified as the symbols to be determined.

  In the subsequent step S3904, it is determined whether or not the second correction condition is satisfied for the determination target symbol specified in step S3903. The second correction condition is the same as the first correction condition described above. If the information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number attached, the second correction condition is the first if the symbol to be determined is a specific symbol. 2 When it is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, the symbol to be determined is It is set so that it is determined that the second correction condition is satisfied when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

  In other words, the first correction condition and the second correction condition have different symbols to be determined. The first correction condition is a determination object that stops at the effective lines L1 to L5, and the second correction condition is the ineffective line L6. A symbol that stops in ~ L11 (out-of-frame region) is set as a determination target. Thus, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved by setting the stop symbol in the out-of-frame area as the determination target. Specifically, in step S3901, if the stop symbol is a combination of a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol, the first correction condition is satisfied regardless of the notice symbol, but the stop symbol is not specified as a specific symbol. The first correction condition is not satisfied when the notice symbol is one of the symbols and the other is the other notice symbol. On the other hand, in step S3904, even if this first correction condition is not satisfied, the second correction condition is satisfied because the other symbol is a stop symbol in the out-of-frame region.

  If it is determined in step S3904 that the second correction condition is not satisfied, the stop symbol correction process is terminated. That is, when the second correction condition is not satisfied, the special figure game times effect is continued with the effect pattern set in the special figure change start process without executing the hold notice. Incidentally, the case of negative determination in step S3904 is a case where two main symbols stop in the upper symbol row Z1 of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the stop symbols are specific symbols (1 and 9 are attached). This is only when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol.

  If it is determined in step S3904 that the second correction condition is satisfied, processing for storing an out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S3905. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706 of the special-fluctuation changing process after the next time, and a process for re-changing effects is performed.

  In a succeeding step S3906, it is determined whether or not the special figure game times being executed are special figure game times corresponding to the normal reach display. If it is determined that the special figure game time corresponds to the normal reach display, in step S3907, a process of storing a turn flag in the RAM 244 is executed. Thus, an affirmative determination is made in step S2701 in the special figure changing middle processing after the next time.

  If the first correction condition is satisfied in step S3902, if it is not normal reach display (no reach is not generated) in step S3906, or after executing the process of step S3907, the process proceeds to step S3908. In step S3908, the second stage correction table as the second stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the second stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the original variable display pattern and the type information of the determination target symbol except when super reach display occurs. The second correction variation display pattern information is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and the address information is set in correspondence with each second correction variation display pattern information. In this case, all of the information on the second correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variable display pattern for each second correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

  Incidentally, in the second stage correction table, the information of the production patterns of the first special figure reservation notice and the second special figure reservation notice is set in correspondence with the information of the notice symbol. Therefore, when the first correction condition is satisfied in step S3902 and the first special figure hold notice is corrected, and in step S3904, the second correction condition is satisfied and the second special figure hold notice is corrected. The production pattern to be referred to is different.

  In the subsequent step S3909, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in step S3902 or step S3904, and the effect of the special figure game times being executed stored in the various address storage areas 246 Second correction address information (second correction information) corresponding to the combination of the pattern information and the second stage correction table is specified from the second stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area.

  In addition, when a plurality of symbols are subject to determination, if the correction condition is satisfied for any symbol, the determination target symbol for which the correction condition is satisfied is determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol with the smaller number or the symbol with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be judged that the correction condition is satisfied. Also good.

  By storing the second correction address information in the correction address storage area, the MPU 242 determines that the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the change based on the information of the progress counter, and then sets the second time set this time. The display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are driven and controlled so as to produce an effect corresponding to the information of the modified display pattern of correction.

  In step S3910, a correction command including the second correction address information stored in step S3909 is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 stores the second correction address information in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254 based on the reception of the correction command. The program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the second stage correction table shown in FIG. Then, the second correction variation display pattern is specified from the second correction address information, and the symbol variation display is executed using the variation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the symbols for notice are stopped and displayed at predetermined positions on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the process of step S3910, after executing the process of storing a notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S3911, the second correction process is terminated.

  Next, the third correction process in step S3708 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the third correction process, first, in step S4001, the stop symbol information of the upper symbol row Z1 and the stop symbol information of the lower symbol row Z3 are grasped based on the information stored in the various address storage areas 246. In this case, there is a case where there is one main symbol and two cases as information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, there are cases where there is one main symbol and two cases as information on the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In subsequent step S4002, it is determined whether or not the third correction condition is satisfied for the determination target symbol specified in step S4001. The third correction condition is satisfied when the same symbol of the same type exists in the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. It is set not to be judged. In addition, even when there is a common symbol of the same type, if the information of the symbol for notice is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number attached, the common symbol of the same type is When it is set to be determined that the third correction condition is satisfied when it is a specific symbol, and the type information of the warning symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, It is set so that it is determined that the third correction condition is satisfied when a common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol. Further, in the third correction condition, even when the same type of common symbol exists, in the case of a stop result corresponding to reach display, that is, when a reach line is formed by the common symbol of the same type Is set so that the third correction condition is not satisfied.

  If it is determined that the third correction condition is not satisfied, in step S4003, based on the information stored in the various address storage areas 246, information on the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 in the out-of-frame region, The information of the lower symbol row Z3 is grasped. In this case, there is a case where there is one main symbol and two cases as information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, there are cases where there is one main symbol and two cases as information on the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In subsequent step S4004, it is determined whether or not the fourth correction condition is satisfied for the symbol to be determined specified in steps S4001 and S4003. The fourth correction condition is a correction condition when there is a common symbol of the same type in the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 including the out-of-frame region and the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. It is set so that it is not determined that is established. In addition, even when there is a common symbol of the same type, if the information of the symbol for notice is a specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an odd number attached, the common symbol of the same type is If it is set to be determined that the fourth correction condition is satisfied when it is a specific symbol, and the type information of the symbol for notice is a non-specific symbol, that is, a main symbol with an even number, It is set so that it is determined that the fourth correction condition is satisfied when a common symbol of the same type is a non-specific symbol.

  Here, in the fourth correction condition, unlike the third correction condition, when a common line of the same type is present, a reach line is formed with a symbol that stops at the ineffective lines L6 to L11. Is set so that the fourth correction condition is satisfied on condition that the other condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the game times in which the out-of-reach effect is executed are not subject to special figure reservation notice. In other words, in the third correction condition for determining the symbols that stop on the effective lines L1 to L5, when the reach line is formed, the third correction condition is set not to be satisfied.

  On the other hand, in the fourth correction condition, the special figure game times that result in stoppage of reach failure as a result of the variable display, that is, the variable display ends, and the stop result is all symbols as the special figure hold notice. When the same kind of symbols are stopped in the columns Z1 to Z3, the special figure game times are set to be handled as special figure reservation notices. Further, when a reach line is formed with a symbol that stops on the ineffective lines L6 to L11, reach display is not performed. In other words, in the fourth correction condition, when the reach line is formed by the symbols that stop on the ineffective lines L6 to L11, the reach display is not performed as described above, but as a result, the result of stoppage of reach failure is obtained. It is set so that the fourth correction condition is established as the figure game times.

  As described above, by setting the stop symbol in the out-of-frame area as a determination target, the possibility that the correction condition is satisfied is improved. Specifically, the pattern having the same type of common symbols in the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 excludes the reach pattern when only the effective lines L1 to L5 are to be determined. In contrast, there are four patterns for one type of symbol, but if the out-of-frame region is included, there are 12 patterns, which is tripled.

  If the fourth correction condition is not satisfied in step S4004, the third correction process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the special figure game times are continued according to the production pattern set in the special figure change start process without executing the special figure hold notice.

  If the fourth correction condition is satisfied in step S4004, processing for storing an out-of-frame flag in the RAM 244 is executed in step S4005. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2706 of the special-fluctuation changing process after the next time, and a process for re-changing effects is performed. In the third correction process, the determination process for determining whether or not the pre-correction is the normal reach display as in the first and second correction processes is not set. This is because in the third correction process, when the normal correction display is before the correction, neither the third correction condition nor the fourth correction condition is satisfied.

  When the third correction condition is satisfied in step S4002, or after executing the process of step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, the third stage correction table as the third stage correction information group stored in the ROM 243 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 61 (c), the third stage correction table is for any combination of the information of the original variable display pattern and the type information of the determination target symbol except when super reach occurs. Information on the third correction variation display pattern is set in a one-to-one correspondence, and address information is set in correspondence with the information on the third correction variation display pattern. In this case, all of the information on the third correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variation display pattern for each third correction is set so as not to change the variation display time in the variation display pattern that was initially set.

  Incidentally, in the third stage correction table, the information of the production patterns of the first special figure reservation advance notice and the second special figure reservation advance notice is set in correspondence with the information of the notice design. Therefore, when the third correction condition is satisfied in step S4002 and corrected to the first special figure reservation notice, and when the fourth correction condition is satisfied and corrected to the second special figure reservation notice in step S4004, The production pattern to be referred to is different.

  In the subsequent step S4007, the type information of the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied in step S4002 or step S4004, and the special figure game times effect being executed stored in the various address storage areas 246 The third correction address information (third correction information) corresponding to the combination of the pattern information and the third stage correction table is specified from the third stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction address storage area.

  In addition, when a plurality of symbols are subject to determination, if the correction condition is satisfied for any symbol, the determination target symbol for which the correction condition is satisfied is determined by lottery or the like. It is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol with the smaller number or the symbol with the larger number is configured to be the symbol to be judged that the correction condition is satisfied. Also good.

  When the third correction address information is stored in the correction address storage area, the MPU 242 determines that the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the change based on the information of the progress counter, and then sets the third information set this time. The display light-emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are driven and controlled so as to produce an effect corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for correction.

  In step S4008, the correction command including the third correction address information stored in step S4007 is output to the display control device 212. In response to receiving the correction command, the display control device 212 stores the third correction address information in the display side correction address storage area of the work RAM 254. Further, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a table similar to the third stage correction table shown in FIG. Then, the third correction variation display pattern is specified from the third correction address information, and the symbol variation display is executed using the variation display pattern. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the symbols corresponding to the information of the symbols for notice are stopped and displayed at predetermined positions on the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After executing the process of step S4008, after executing the process of storing the notice execution flag in the RAM 244 in step S4009, the third correction process is terminated.

  As a result of the above, if the notice condition on the special figure side is met while the special figure game times are being displayed, the special figure hold notice will be executed at the special figure game times where the special display is performed. Be able to be. In this case, since the out-of-frame area is also determined as a determination target in the symbol correction process, the possibility of correction can be dramatically improved, and the opportunity for executing the special symbol hold notice can be increased.

<Regarding the processing related to various effects on the ordinary map>
Next, processing related to various effects on the normal map side will be described. The processing related to various effects on the general map side is roughly divided into the general diagram fluctuation display control processing related to the control control of general game times, the support status processing related to the control control for the support status, and the hold display on the general map side. The common figure hold control process related to the production control is set. These processes are started every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

<Normal map display control processing>
First, the common map display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described below. In the common figure variation display control process, when the common figure variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the common symbols for one game, When the universal symbol change end command transmitted from the control device 81 is received, a process of finally stopping and displaying the normal symbol variation display is executed.

  In the common figure variation display control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64, whether or not the common figure game is being played in step S4101, that is, the fluctuation display of the common figure for one game time is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Determine if it is running. If the fluctuation display of the usual symbols for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not the usual figure changing command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the command for changing the normal map is not received, the normal map change display control process is terminated. If the command for changing the normal map has been received, the process for starting the normal map change is executed in step S4103, and then the control for changing the display of the normal map is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the change display of the normal symbols for one game is being performed, it is determined in step S4104 whether or not the normal change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If the universal change end command has not been received, the normal change processing is executed in step S4105, and then the normal change display control process ends. In the normal variation processing, the display control device 212 is controlled so that the general diagram game times are executed with the contents determined in the general variation start processing. If the map change end command is received in step S4104, the map change display control process is terminated after executing the map change end process in step S4106. In the process for ending the general-purpose game, the process for ending the general-purpose game times is ended to display the game results of the general-purpose game times, and various flags and counters used in the general-purpose game times are displayed. Execute the clear process.

<Usual change start processing>
The process for starting the usual figure change is a process for starting the effect for the usual figure game times based on the reception of the command for changing the usual figure transmitted from the main control device 81. Here, prior to the description of the usual figure variation start process, the contents of the effect of the ordinary figure game times will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  As already described, the fluctuation display of the general game game times on the display screen G is performed by switching the display colors of the two display units in the general graphic display area P. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (a1), when the general game play is started from the situation where the display colors of the two display units are displayed in the same or substantially the same first display color (for example, white), As shown in FIG. 65 (a2), the display color of one display unit is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) that is different from the previous color (in the figure, the difference in color of the display unit is hatched). Are displayed differently). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (a3), the color of the display unit on the side switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display unit is set to the first display color. The display color is switched to the second display color, and the color of each display unit is switched again as shown in FIG. In general, the variation display of the game game times is basically repeated by switching the display colors of the two display sections (FIG. 65 (a2) → FIG. 65 (a3) → FIG. 65 (a4) → FIG. 65 (a2) Repeated). The switching of the display color is set so as to make one round in about 0.5 sec, and it is difficult for the player to identify each display before and after the switching.

  When the fluctuation display time of the usual figure game times elapses, the game result of the usual figure game times is notified as to whether the result is an opening result or a disengagement result. In the case of the release result, as shown in FIG. 65 (a5), both of the two display units become the second display color, and the variable display is finished. In the case of the release result, FIG. 65 (a1) As shown in the figure, both of the two display units are changed to the first display color, and the variable display ends. In other words, the variation display mode and the game result notification mode (variation display stop result) in the general game times have a simple configuration compared to the special game game side.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65 (b), in the process for starting the normal fluctuation in the present embodiment, first, in step S4201, the currently received normal map change command is read, and the variable display time is determined from the command. Identify the information. Further, as already described, when the main control device 81 transmits a general map change command, it also transmits a general map type command. Therefore, in step S4201, the common figure type command received together with the currently received common figure change command is read, and game result information (release result or outlier result) is specified from the command. In step S4201, the information indicating whether or not it is the release result and the variable display time information are grasped from the identified information, and the grasped information is stored in the second secondary execution area SAE2 in the storage area 250 for holding in the RAM 244. Remember.

  In the subsequent step S4202, a process for setting a stop result in the ordinary game game started this time is executed based on the information grasped in step S4201. That is, when the information specified in step S4201 is the release result, the stop result is displayed so that the two display units are stopped and displayed in the second display color at the end of the variable display in the current general game game times. If the information specified in step S4201 is an outlier result, the two display units are stopped and displayed in the first display color at the end of the variable display in the current general game game times. Set the stop result.

  Then, in step S4203, a process for outputting a command to the display control device 212 is executed so as to start an effect for the usual game game times, and then the process for starting the ordinary figure fluctuation is ended. Based on the received command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control for executing an effect in the current general game game times on the symbol display device 41. Note that, as described above, the general game game times only switch the display colors of the two display units in the general map display area P, so that the display control device 212 has received the command. Based on this, display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to periodically perform display switching of the display color of the display unit.

<Support status processing>
Next, the support state process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the support state process, a process for performing an effect during the support state in the symbol display device 41 based on a support state command such as a general opening command or a general ending command transmitted from the main control device 81 is performed. Run.

  That is, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the usual game game is being executed. When the ordinary game game is being executed, the support state process is terminated as it is. In this process, in the above-mentioned usual figure fluctuation display control process, the figure game start is being executed from the execution of the usual figure fluctuation start process to the end of the usual figure fluctuation end process. Specifically, the variable display is started in the general-purpose display area P in the accessory display 44 on the main control device 81 side and the symbol display device 41, and the variable display is ended, and the result of the lottery determination on the general-purpose side is displayed. It is determined that the usual game game is being executed until the stop result is notified. As for this determination, for example, in the process of starting the effect for the general game play in step S4203 of the process for starting the normal map change, the flag for executing the normal map is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. Then, when the confirmation display is executed in the process for ending normal map change (when the variable display is ended), the flag for executing the normal map is deleted, and it is determined whether or not the flag is stored in step S4301. It is preferable that the determination is made.

  If the usual game times are not being executed, the process proceeds to step S4302, and it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous usual game times is a result corresponding to the transition to the support state. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous ordinary game game was an open result. If the result is not the release result but the release result, the support state process is terminated as it is. If it is a release result, the process advances to step S4303.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes according to the game state by the side of a special figure also in the effect in this support state. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the production | presentation in a support state differs according to each release result of the normal figure side, and the presentation result in a support state may differ by the release result selected depending on the game state of a special figure side. . In this way, it is possible to suitably notify the support state according to the state on the special figure side.

  In step S4303, it is determined whether or not the opening control of the electric accessory 34a is being executed as a result of shifting to the support state. If the release control is being executed, the process proceeds to step S4305, where the support state process is performed, and then the support state process ends. In the process during the support state in step S4305, a process for notifying that the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is performed in the support state, that is, the situation where the holding on the special drawing side is easily acquired is performed. Examples of the notification include character display such as “Helping!” And “Aim!” In the area adjacent to the general-purpose display area P of the symbol display device 41, and the reserved display areas Ga and Gb on the special figure side. In particular, a configuration in which the background color is changed to a color different from the background color in the second reserved display area Gb corresponding to the lower working port 34 is conceivable.

  If it is determined in step S4303 that the opening / closing control is not being executed, that is, if the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is not currently being executed even if the game result of the previous ordinary game game is an opening result. The process proceeds to step S4304. The case where the process proceeds to step S4304 is the standby time before the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a, that is, the opening period (OP period), or after the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is performed, The waiting time until the start of the game round, that is, the ending period (ED period), or the situation where the hold information on the usual figure side that triggers the usual figure game round is not acquired can be considered. In this embodiment, processing for performing an OP period or an ED period is set as an effect during the support state. In steps S4305 to S4312 below, the effects during the OP period and the ED period are set. Perform the process to do. The following description will be given with reference to FIGS. 27, 28, 30 and 31 again.

  In step S4305, it is determined whether or not an ordinary opening command has been received. As shown in FIG. 27, the universal figure opening command is a command set in the universal figure game state transition process (step S1708) on the main controller 81 side, and this command includes a game result of the universal figure game times ( The content of the distribution result) is included. If the ordinary map opening command has been received in step S4305, processing for grasping the contents of the OP effect is executed in step S4306. As shown in FIG. 31, in this embodiment, the contents of the OP effect on the normal diagram side have a one-to-one correspondence with the game result (distribution result), and on the effect control device 82 side, It is possible to grasp the contents of the OP effect only by grasping the game result. That is, if the first release results A1, A2, the second release results B2, B3, and the third release results C2, C3, it is understood that the OP effect is not executed. Further, if the first release result A3 and the second release result B1, it is understood that the OP1 effect is executed. If it is the third release result C1, it is understood that the OP2 effect is executed.

  In the subsequent step S4307, it is determined whether or not to execute the OP effect based on the processing result in step S4306. If it is determined that the OP effect is to be executed, an OP effect execution process is performed in step S4308. In the execution process of the OP effect, a command including information on the content of the OP effect (OP1 effect or OP2 effect) is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the OP effect image data from the character ROM 256 and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Thereby, the corresponding OP effect is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 30A).

  If it is determined in step S4305 that an ordinary opening command has not been received, if it is determined in step S4307 that an OP effect is not to be executed, or after the processing in step S4308 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S4309. In step S4309, it is determined whether a normal ending command has been received. As shown in FIG. 28, the usual figure ending command is a command set in the accessory opening / closing process (step S1819) on the main control device 81 side, and the command result (distribution) of the usual figure game times is included in this command. Results) are included. If the normal ending command is received in step S4309, processing for grasping the content of the ED effect is executed in step S4310. As shown in FIG. 31, in this embodiment, the contents of the ED effect on the normal map side correspond one-to-one with the game result (distribution result) as in the OP effect, and the effect control device 82 side Then, it is possible to grasp the contents of the ED effect only by grasping the game result of the ordinary game times. That is, if the first release results A1, A2, the second release results B2, B3, and the third release results C2, C3, it is understood that the ED effect is not executed. Moreover, if it is 1st opening result A3 and 2nd opening result B1, it will grasp | ascertain that ED1 production will be performed. If it is the third release result C1, it is understood that the ED2 effect is executed.

  In the subsequent step S4311, it is determined whether or not to execute the ED effect based on the processing result in step S4310. If it is determined to execute the ED effect, an ED effect execution process is performed in step S4312. In the execution process of the ED effect, a command including information on the content of the ED effect (ED1 effect or ED2 effect) is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for ED effect from the character ROM 256 and controls the symbol display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Thereby, the corresponding ED effect is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 (FIG. 30B).

  When a negative determination is made in step S4309 or step S4311, or after the process of step S4312 is executed, the support state process is terminated.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the transition to the support state is performed as a result of the ordinary game play, but as an effect for that, the effect during the ordinary game play is also simpler than the effect on the special figure side. The production during the support state is also simple. And on the production control device 82 side, the contents (game results) grasped on the main control device 81 side are used as they are, so that those productions are executed. In the configuration in which the production process is executed in parallel, the processing load of the production process on the ordinary drawing side is reduced, and accordingly, the processing capacity can be allocated to the production on the special drawing side. Become.

<Explanation of processing related to general map hold notice>
In the present embodiment, not only on the special notice side notice of hold, but also on the general figure side, at the timing before the execution of the general figure game times in which the result of the determination on whether or not the common figure is judged is notified. There is a case where a general-purpose hold notice corresponding to the result of the determination is made. In the following, a process for executing a general map hold notice will be described.

<Processing performed by main controller 81>
As the process related to the general map hold notice, a process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and a process executed by the effect control device 82 are set. Therefore, the process on the main control device 81 side will be described first, and then the process on the effect control device 82 side will be described.

<Temporary hold processing>
First, the process for holding a common map executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the ordinary-pending process is a process executed in step S206 of the winning process for through of the timer interrupt process.

  In the usual figure holding process, in step S4401, the information for determining whether or not the figure is normal, that is, the open random number counter among the holding information acquired in step S205 in the through prize process based on the current winning to the through gate 35. The information latched from C4 and the information for the open type, that is, the information latched from the open type counter C5 are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S4402, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, thereby determining whether the current support mode is high or low. If the mode is the low frequency support mode, the success / failure table for the low frequency support mode is referred to in step S4403. If the mode is the high frequency support mode, the success / failure table for the high frequency support mode is referred to in step S4404. As shown in FIG. 8C, in this embodiment, a common success / failure table is used regardless of the level of the support mode, and therefore the success / failure tables referred to in step S4403 and step S4404 are the same.

  In step S4405, based on the information of the open random number counter C4 grasped in step S4401 and the information of the success / failure table referred to in step S4403 or step S4404, the currently reserved hold information acquired this time is the release result. Determine whether or not you have won. If it is determined that the release result is won, it is determined in step S4406 whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204, thereby determining whether the current support mode is high or low. If it is in the low frequency support mode, the distribution table in the low frequency support mode shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in step S4407. If it is in the high frequency support mode, in FIG. ) Refer to the distribution table in the high frequency support mode. Then, in step S4409, based on the information of the open type counter C5 grasped in step S4401 and the information of the distribution table referred to in step S4407 or step S4408, the hold information for ordinary use acquired this time is added. Understand the type of support state to be migrated based on.

  If it is determined in step S4405 that the support state does not occur, or after the type of support state is determined in step S4409, the process proceeds to step S4410. In step S4410, based on the information stored in the electronic role holding area 233, a process of grasping the number of holding information on the normal side (the number of holdings of common drawing FN) is executed. Then, in step S44111, a process for setting the general map hold command as an output target to the effect control device 82 is executed, and then the general map hold process is ended.

  The pending command is configured as multi-byte information, and some of the bits include information indicating that it is a pending command and information on the type of the pending command. In addition, it is possible to set information on the number of pending orders. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the present embodiment, various ordinary map pending commands are stored in the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203. As these various ordinary map holding commands, commands corresponding one-to-one are stored in accordance with the result of lottery determination and distribution on the ordinary map side. Specifically, if the result of the lottery on the normal map side is an open result, A1 to A3, B1 to B3, C1 to C3 commands are stored according to the subsequent distribution result, and When the result of the lottery on the normal map side is a result of losing, a detaching command is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the first opening result A1, A2, the second opening result B3 and the third opening result C3, and the first opening result A3 and the second opening result B1 are mutually opened and closed. Although the aspects are different, the length of the OP period and the ED period, the OP effect, and the ED effect are the same. Furthermore, although the second opening result B1 and the third opening result C1 are the same results in the length of the OP period and the ED period and the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a, the contents of the OP effect and the ED effect are different. doing. In addition, the second release result B2 and the third release result C2, and the second release result B3 and the third release result C3 are respectively the length of the OP period and the ED period, the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 34a, and the OP Both the contents of the production ED production are the same. The processing on the side of the effect control device 82 that has received these commands will be described below. However, even if the contents of various effects, the effect period, the opening / closing mode, etc. are common, the commands are made different from each other. In this way, it is possible to provide expansion of production on the production control device 82 side.

<Regarding the map hold control process executed by the production control device 82>
Next, the common figure hold control process executed by the MPU 202 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The usual hold control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252 and is activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not any pending command for ordinary use has been received from the main controller 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, a general-purpose hold notice setting process is executed as a process corresponding to the received hold command in step S4502.

  Here, in the present embodiment, an effect of changing the type of the holding image displayed in the third holding display area Gc is set as the general drawing holding notice. That is, the holding image corresponding to the result when the determination on the normal side is made at the timing before the execution of the general game game time in which the result of the normal determination on the normal side is notified is the third image. It is displayed in the hold display area Gc. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the normal holding image SPA and the special holding image SPB are provided as the holding image SP for the normal drawing as the holding image for the normal drawing. These holding images SPA and SPB are set so that their colors and shapes are different from each other. In the figure, the appearance is displayed differently depending on the presence or absence of a hatch. In the ordinary figure hold advance notice setting process in step S4502, the hold image for the ordinary figure is set. The general figure hold notice setting process will be described later in detail.

  In subsequent step S4503, 1 is added to the accessory-use secondary storage number DFN stored in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244. In step S4503, a process of storing the hold information of the received hold command in the RAM 244 is executed. As described above, the RAM 244 is provided with the storage area 250 for storage as an area for storing the storage information, and the storage area for storage 250 is provided with the secondary side power storage area 250c. In step S4503, the information contained in the hold command is stored in the area with the smallest number (the area that is the target of the first or second determination) among the empty areas of the first area to the fourth area in the sub-side power role reservation area 250c. Remember. As already described, the hold command includes information on the game result on the normal side. In step S4503, processing for storing these pieces of information in the corresponding area is executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4501 or after execution of step S4503, the process proceeds to step S4504, and it is determined whether a normal shift command is received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4504, 1 is subtracted from the accessory secondary-side reserved storage number DFN in step S4505. In step S4505, a process corresponding to a decrease in the number of reserved memories (for example, a process for controlling the light emission of the third reserved light emitting unit 47 or changing the hold information displayed on the display screen G) is executed. In step S4505, a shift process is executed. In this shift process, the hold information set in each area of the hold storage area 250 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the hold information in the first area in the sub-side power role reservation area 250c is cleared, and the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Shift the hold display information in each area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4504 or after execution of the process in step S4505, the ordinary map hold control process is terminated.

<Temporary map hold notice setting process>
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69 (a), the general map hold advance notice setting process of step S4502 will be described.

  In step S4601, a process of grasping the current accessory secondary storage number SFN is executed. In the subsequent step S4602, the result of the lottery on the normal map side is determined by determining the type of the general map hold command received this time. In step S4603, a process for grasping the game situation on the special drawing side is executed. In the present embodiment, when setting the above-mentioned holding image for a general map, that is, when performing a general map holding advance notice, not only the result of lottery on the normal map side but also the game situation on the special map side is referred to. Then, depending on the game situation on the special figure side, either the notice low probability state or the notice high probability state in which the execution probability of the hold notice on the common figure side is relatively high or low is set. The situation grasp processing on the special figure side will be described in detail later.

  In step S4604, based on the processing result in step S4603, it is determined whether or not the advanced warning probability state is set. When the notice low probability state is set instead of the notice high probability state, the notice low probability table is referenced from the various table storage areas 245 in step S4605. On the other hand, if it is set to the advance notice probability state, the advance notice probability table is referenced from the various table storage areas 245 in step S4606.

  Compared to the case where the result of lottery on the usual map side is the same, the probability that the common map hold notice will be executed is compared with the low probability table and the high probability table (i.e. The probability that the image will be the special reserve image SPB instead of the special image SPA) is set to be relatively high and low. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the result of lottery on the normal map side is an outlier result, the special reserve image SPB is selected when the notice low probability table is referenced. First, when the advance notice probability table is referenced, the special reserve image SPB is selected with a probability of 10%. In addition, when the result of the lottery on the normal side is an open result, when the notice low probability table is referenced, the special reserve image SPB is selected with a probability of 5%, and the notice high probability table is referenced. Then, the special reserve image SPB is selected with a probability of 50%. It should be noted that the selection probability of the special reserve image SPB (probability of execution of the usual map hold notice) may be varied depending on the type of release result, or a plurality of types of special reserve images SPB may be set and any of the release images may be released. It is good also as a structure which changes the kind of image SPB for special hold selected according to the expectation degree as a result and the expectation degree which becomes a high winning support state. However, from the viewpoint that the general map hold notice is an auxiliary effect on the special figure side, it is preferable to have a simple configuration as in this embodiment to the extent that it does not interfere with the special figure side effect.

  In subsequent step S4607, based on the table referenced in step S4605 or step S4606 and the information on the pending map hold command received this time (result of the lottery lottery), whether or not the pending map notice has been won. Determine whether. If it is determined in step S4607 that the general figure hold advance notice has not been won, in step S4608, the general hold image is temporarily set as the normal hold image SPA. If it is determined in step S4607 that the common figure reservation notice has been won, in step S4609, the general hold image is set as the special hold image SPB.

  Here, in step S4608, the hold image for normal use is temporarily set as the normal hold image SPA, whereas in FIG. S4609, the hold image for normal use is set as the special hold image SPB. Then, after provisional setting in step S4608, timing change processing is executed in step S4610. In this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not the hold image temporarily set in step S4608 can be changed to the special hold image SPB at a later timing. By this change processing, the hold image temporarily set in step S4608 is confirmed. This change process will be described later in detail.

  In step S4611, a process for outputting a hold display command including the hold image information set in step S4609 or step S4610 to the display control device 212 is executed. Thereafter, the ordinary map hold advance notice setting process is terminated. The display control device 212 that has received the hold display command reads the image data of the corresponding hold image from the character ROM 256 and displays the symbol display device 41 so as to display it on the unit display areas Gc1 to Gc4 of the corresponding third hold display area Gc. Control display.

<Special situation side grasping process>
Next, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side in step S4603 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S4702 whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. In the case of the high frequency support mode, in step S4703, whether or not the high frequency support mode is a high frequency support mode with a limited number of times, that is, a special chart that triggers the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not the side game result is a normal jackpot result. For this determination, for example, various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 may be used. Specifically, based on the fact that the game result on the special figure side is a normal jackpot result, a flag with a limit is stored in the various flag storage areas 247, and after the game number of limit times (100 times) is executed Alternatively, the flag is erased based on the fact that one of the probable jackpot results is obtained. Then, by checking the presence / absence of this limited flag, it can be determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is limited.

  If it is determined in step S4703 that the high frequency support mode is limited in number of times, in step S4704, in the high frequency support mode in which the number of times is limited, the number of remaining special figure game times that the high frequency support mode continues is determined. Execute the process to grasp. For this determination, for example, various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 may be used. Specifically, based on the fact that the game result on the special figure side is a normal jackpot result, the upper limit number is input to a predetermined counter in the various counter areas 249. Then, every time the special figure game is executed, a process of subtracting the predetermined counter by one is performed. In step S4704, by confirming the value of the predetermined counter, it is possible to grasp the number of remaining special figure game times in the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times.

  In subsequent step S4705, based on the processing result in step S4704, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining special figure game times is equal to or less than a predetermined number. In the present embodiment, the predetermined number of times is set to four, which is the same as the upper limit storage number of the hold information based on the winning to the lower operation port 34.

  When it is determined in step S4701 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, when it is determined in step S4703 that it is not in the high frequency support mode with no frequency limit, or when it is determined that it is not less than the predetermined number in step S4705 Advances to step S4706. In step S4706, the notice low probability flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244, thereby setting the notice low probability state. Thereafter, the situation grasping process on the side of this special figure is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4702 that it is not in the high frequency support mode, or even in the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times in step S4705, it is determined that the number of remaining special figure game times is not less than the predetermined number. If so, the process proceeds to step S4707. In step S4707, based on the grasp result in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the current accessory secondary storage number SFN is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (“2” in the present embodiment). If the accessory side secondary storage number SFN is less than the predetermined number, the process advances to step S4706 to set the notice low probability state. If the accessory side reserved storage number SFN is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process advances to step S4708 to delete the warning low probability flag in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244, thereby setting the warning high probability. Thereafter, the situation grasping process on the side of this special figure is terminated.

<Timing change processing>
Next, the timing change process in step S4610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4801, a process of temporarily delaying the execution timing of the general map hold advance notice by a predetermined time from the start timing of the current general figure hold advance notice setting process is executed. Specifically, as the predetermined time, for example, the timing of subtracting 1 from the accessory side secondary storage number SFN grasped in step S4601 (that is, the one-game display time for the normal game play time) Temporarily change the execution timing. In this case, if the accessory side secondary storage number SFN is 0, that is, if the normal game game number is not currently being executed, a predetermined time (for example, a general game game time) is set as the predetermined time. 10 seconds, which is shorter than the one-variable display time), the temporary change notice is temporarily changed to be executed.

  In the subsequent step S4802, it is determined whether or not the execution timing temporarily changed in step S4801 is in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S4803 whether the temporarily changed execution timing is in the high frequency support mode. In the case of the high frequency support mode, in step S4804, whether or not the high frequency support mode is a high frequency support mode with a limited number of times, that is, a special chart that triggers the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not the side game result is a normal jackpot result.

  If it is determined in step S4804 that the high frequency support mode is limited in number of times, in step S4805, in the high frequency support mode where the number of times is limited, the number of remaining special figure game times that the high frequency support mode continues is determined. Execute the process to grasp. In subsequent step S4806, based on the processing result of step S4805, whether or not the number of remaining special figure game times is equal to or less than a predetermined number (same as step S4705, four times or less in the present embodiment). Determine whether.

  When it is determined in step S4802 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, when it is determined in step S4804 that it is not in the high frequency support mode without frequency limit, or when it is determined in step S4806 that it is not less than the predetermined number of times. Advances to step S4807. In step S4807, a process for determining the normal holding image temporarily set in step S4608 as the normal holding image SPA is executed. Thereafter, the timing changing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4803 that it is not in the high frequency support mode, or it is determined in step S4806 that the number of remaining special figure game times is not less than the predetermined number even in the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times. If YES in step S4808, the flow advances to step S4808 to execute processing for storing the change timing of the hold image for normal use (the timing temporarily changed in step S4801). Then, in step S4809, a process of storing the temporary holding image temporarily set in step S4608 so as to be changed as the special holding image SPB at the change timing stored in step S4808 is executed. . Thereafter, the timing changing process is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Depending on the game state (game situation) on the special figure side, the notice low probability state or the high notice probability state is set, and the process for executing the hold notice on the normal figure side differs depending on the set state. did. By doing in this way, according to the game state of the special figure side, it becomes possible to suitably perform the holding notice on the normal figure side. The result of lottery on the normal map side is whether or not there is a shift to a support state in which a winning to the lower operating port 34 is allowed. It is considered that the player is highly interested in the general-use hold notice that notifies in advance of the possibility of transition to the support state.

  However, depending on the game state on the special drawing side, for example, in a situation where winning to the big winning opening 32a can frequently occur, such as in the opening / closing execution mode, even if winning to the lower operating opening 34 occurs. It will not be very happy (compared to the normal game state), and it is more advantageous for the player to perform a performance that congratulates the opening and closing execution mode rather than such a performance. It is thought that it is delightful for reasons such as soaking. In view of this, during the opening / closing execution mode, the special map hold notice is prevented from being performed as much as possible, so that the special drawing side can be fully enjoyed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which transfers to high frequency support mode after opening / closing execution mode. During the high frequency support mode, since the state frequently shifts to the high winning support state, winning to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the low-frequency support mode is set during the opening / closing execution mode, a situation in which the hold information based on winning in the lower operation port 34 is not stored so much is likely to occur immediately after the opening / closing execution mode. The determination of whether or not the hold information is based on winning in the lower operating port 34 is more advantageous for the player than the determination of whether or not the hold information is based on winning in the upper operating port 33. In such a configuration, if the possibility of transition to the support state is notified during the opening / closing execution mode, the launch of the game ball is temporarily stopped to win the lower operating port 34 as much as possible during the opening / closing execution mode. There is a possibility that an action of so-called stopping is performed, such as starting the launch at the timing when the support state is reached. If such a stoppage is performed, it may be difficult for the game hall manager to distinguish from an illegal act of performing an illegal launch operation, and as a result, it may be difficult to detect the illegal act. Therefore, as in this embodiment, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to make a general hold notice during the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned stoppage from being performed in advance, and to detect fraudulent acts as a result. This can be facilitated.

  In addition, even immediately after the opening / closing execution mode, if there is a general map hold notice about the hold information on the general map side acquired during the open / close execution mode, a game ball is fired in accordance with the general figure hold notice, That is, it is conceivable that an act of stopping the game ball is stopped until the state shifts to the support state. Therefore, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to make a general map hold notice during the opening / closing execution mode as described above, it is possible to prevent not only the opening / closing execution mode but also a stoppage from being made thereafter.

  On the other hand, when shifting to the high frequency support mode, the high winning support state may frequently occur. In such a situation, if a regular hold notice is frequently made in advance to notify the occurrence of the support status, there is a possibility that it may be annoying for the player despite the fact that the presentation is made with great effort. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the high-frequency support mode, it is difficult to make a general map hold notice, so that it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that makes the general figure hold notice feel troublesome as described above. . In other words, it is considered that the player feels a good feeling about advance notification of the possibility of transition to the support state because the usual-pending notice is performed in the low-frequency support mode in which the support state is unlikely to occur. Therefore, if the production is set in accordance with the player's emotion in this way, the production can be suitably enjoyed.

  Even in the high frequency support mode, in the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times, depending on the remaining number of times, there may be a scene where it is desired to know the occurrence of the support state. For example, when the remaining number of times is equal to or less than the upper limit storage number (4) of the hold information based on the winning to the lower operation port 34, the lottery on the special map side of the hold information currently stored ends (from the present time) In order to shift from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the player can lower the operating port while performing the lottery of the currently stored hold information as much as possible. It seems that he wants to win 34. By doing so, in addition to the upper limit number of times with a limit on the number of times, the winner's lottery on the special figure side can be obtained for the upper limit storage number of the hold information based on the winning to the lower operating port 34, for the player Is advantageous. In view of this, in such a situation, the configuration is such that a general-purpose hold notice is easily performed, so that the player can aim at the lower operation port 34 and fire the game ball with peace of mind.

  In other words, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to make a general hold notice in the situation just before the end of the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times, if the player does not know whether the support state will occur or not In the meantime, the merit of reducing the useless balls after waiting for the end of the high-frequency support state without firing the game balls can be larger than the merit of winning the lower operating port 34. Therefore, it seems that some players want to make a stop hitting, and it is possible to expect the effect of suppressing the stop hitting with the above configuration.

  As a result of the success / failure lottery on the normal map side, a plurality of results (for example, the second release result B2 and the third release result C2 and the second release result B3 and the third release result C3 are similar). Etc.), and a general map hold command was set for each of these multiple results. The usual figure hold command is output to the effect control device 82 which is a sub-side control device based on a winning to the through gate 35. Therefore, on the side of the production control device 82, even if the opening / closing mode is the same, it is not necessary to determine the game result only by grasping the types of the usual drawing hold commands. In other words, if it is configured to set information on which of the plurality of results is set for one common map hold command, it is necessary to set a process for reading it on the production control device 82 side. obtain. Further, in the configuration in which information indicating which of the plurality of results is set for one general-pending hold command is set, a counter for success / failure lottery (open random number counter C4 or A configuration in which an open type counter C5 or the like) is set is also conceivable. Then, if an illegal act of reading the input / output of a command between the main control device 81 and the production control device 82 is performed, the information included in the normal map hold command is analyzed and used for the lottery determination on the normal map side. The possibility that the counter is also read increases. On the other hand, if the type of the pending map command is different, even if the pending map command is read, the corresponding lottery counter will not be read, and the corresponding lottery counter itself is set as the command. Even if compared with a configuration in which only the game result is set as a command without making a match, it is more difficult to associate the information included in the command with the counter for success / failure lottery in this embodiment, and the act of analyzing illegally is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

  As a waiting period before and after the support state, the OP period and the ED period for normal use are made different according to the game state on the special drawing side. By doing in this way, the time for performing the effects before and after the support state (OP effects and ED effects) can be set according to the game state on the special drawing side, and these effects can be suitably executed. It becomes possible.

  The OP period and the ED period are set so that the OP period and the ED period are shorter in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode. During the low-frequency support mode, it is relatively rare to enter the support state, so that if the winning to the lower operation port 34 is allowed, it can be felt as a merit for the player. Therefore, it is considered that it is meaningful to notify the start / end of the support state in the OP period and the ED period during the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, during the high-frequency support mode, the support state can frequently occur, and on the assumption that it is a game state that does not significantly reduce the ball. Therefore, it is considered that the player cannot feel that the support state is generated in such a situation and the winning to the lower operation port 34 is allowed to be more advantageous than in the low frequency support mode. Furthermore, if the waiting periods before and after each of the support states that occur frequently as described above are set to be long, the frequency of entering the support state is considered to decrease, and the production is frequently performed. This can make it feel annoying. Therefore, if the OP period and the ED period between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as described above, it is possible to adjust the support state and the frequency of effects according to each game state.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the situation grasping process on the special figure side is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the situation grasping process on the special drawing side in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not special figure game times are being executed. When the special figure game times are being executed, in the following step S4902, a process for grasping the remaining time of the special figure game times being executed is executed. In this process, the values of the progress counters provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 referred to in the above correction process are referred to.

  In a succeeding step S4903, a process of grasping information on the variable display time related to the hold information on the special figure side before execution is executed. In the various table storage areas 245 in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82, the same variable display time table as the variable display time table on the main control device 81 side is stored. And in the special figure side holding information (holding information stored in the first sub-side holding area 250a and the second sub-side holding area 250b) stored in the holding storage area 250 of the production control device 82, Contains information about variable display times. In step S4903, processing for grasping information related to the variable display time is executed for each of the special map side hold information stored in the hold storage area 250.

  Here, as already described, while the variable display time is set in advance for the hold information in which reach display occurs, the variable display time of the hold information in which reach display does not occur is determined according to the number of hold at the time of the determination of success / failure. The length is different. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable display time when no reach occurs is specified based on the number of hold information at the time of execution of the process of step S4903.

  In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the hold information that does not generate reach display for each hold information on the special figure side is specified according to the number of holds at the time of the processing of step S4903, the hold information that does not generate reach display As a configuration for specifying the fluctuation display time as a temporary fluctuation display time (for example, the longest fluctuation display time, the shortest fluctuation display time, and the average fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display times that can be selected). Good.

  After executing the process of step S4903, in step S4904, the remaining variable display time of the special figure game times being executed that was grasped in step S4902 and the special information relating to the unreserved pending information that was grasped in step S4903. A process of adding the variable display time of the figure game times is executed. In this process, counters for calculation provided in various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 may be used. Alternatively, the information on the variable display time may be added to the calculation counter each time the processing of step S4902 or step S4903 is performed.

  After executing the processing of step S4904, based on the processing result of step S4904, in step S4909, it is determined whether or not the total remaining variation display time of the game time on the special figure side is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 120 sec). judge. If it is determined in step S4901 that the special figure game times are not being executed, or if it is determined in step S4905 that it is less than the predetermined time, the warning low probability state is set in step S4906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the predetermined time is exceeded, a notice high probability state is set in step S4907. After executing the process of step S4906 or step S4907, this situation grasping process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the longer the remaining variable display time of the special figure game times is, the easier the general figure hold notice is executed. An effect can be set. For example, in the case where the remaining fluctuation display time of the special figure game times is long, it is conceivable that the player stops the game ball and waits for the special figure game times to be consumed. On the other hand, if a winning at the lower operating port 34 occurs, not only the winning / losing lottery related to the holding information based on the winning will be performed, but the player can obtain a prize ball as a privilege, If notification of the possibility of occurrence of a support state is given by the advance notice, the significance of continuing to launch the game ball arises, not only eliminating the waiting period for digestion of the special figure game times as described above, but also the effect of suppressing stop hitting Can also be expected.

  Instead of or in addition to the configuration for grasping the fluctuation display time of the game times on the special figure side, as a constitution for grasping the number of reserved information on the special figure side and setting the general figure suspension notice based on it. Also good. If it is configured to grasp only the number of pending information, it is possible to achieve the above effect with a simple configuration, and if configured to grasp the number of pending information and the variable display time, for example, pending information If the number is less than or equal to the predetermined number (1), it is possible to adopt a configuration such as setting the notice high probability state regardless of the length of the variable display time. can do.

  In addition, the configuration is such that the general map hold advance notice is set based on the variable display time of all the hold information on the special figure side. However, the hold information on the special figure side includes predetermined hold information (for example, hold information for super reach, Based on a part of the hold information of the special-side hold information, such as when the game result contains 15R probability change jackpot result) or when the predetermined number of the hold information is included It is good also as a structure which performs the setting of a general figure hold advance notice.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the situation grasping process on the special figure side is different from the processes in the first and second embodiments. Hereinafter, the situation grasp processing on the special drawing side in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S5001, it is determined whether or not special figure game times are being executed. This process is the same as the process of step S4901. If the special figure game times are being executed, it is determined in step S5002 whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, it is determined in step S5003 whether or not the notice execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. As already described, the notice condition establishment flag and the notice execution flag are flags related to the hold notice on the special figure side. More specifically, the advance notice condition establishment flag is a flag that is stored when it is decided to make a special figure hold advance notice based on the receipt of the special figure hold command. The advance notice flag is a flag that is stored when a special figure hold notice is executed in the special figure game times performed in a situation where the notice condition establishment flag is stored.

  If it is determined in step S5001 that the special figure game times are not being executed, or if it is determined in step S5002 that a notice condition establishment flag is stored and a notice execution flag is stored in step S5003. If it is determined that there is a warning low probability state in step S5004. On the other hand, if the notice condition establishment flag is not stored in step S5002, or it is determined that the notice condition establishment flag is stored in step S5002, and it is determined that the notice execution flag is not stored in step S5003. In such a case, the notice high probability state is set in step S5005. After executing the process of step S5004 or step S5005, the present situation grasping process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the execution state of the special figure side effect (special game time), the setting of the hold notice on the general map side is changed according to the execution state of the special figure hold notice. It is possible to set whether or not to execute the effect on the normal drawing side in accordance with the scene where the special drawing side effect is desired to be noticed or not. More specifically, the hold notification on the special map side is difficult to perform in the situation where the hold notice on the special figure side is being performed, and conversely on the situation where the hold notice on the special figure side is not provided It is assumed that the advance notice is easily made. The special notice hold notice is an effect that suggests the possibility of subsequently shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, and in such a situation, the player is high in the special figure side game times. It is considered that the player is interested, and if the player is convinced of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is considered that the merit is not felt so much even if the lower operation port 34 is won. On the other hand, in the situation where there is no hold notice on the special figure side, of course, there is interest in the game times on the special figure side, but more hold information is acquired, suggesting the transition to the opening and closing execution mode It is considered that the player is expecting that the production will not be performed, that is, whether the special figure reservation notice will be started. Therefore, in a situation where the special notice side advance notice is not performed, it is possible to raise a great interest in the hold advance notice only by executing the ordinary notice side advance notice.

  If the notice condition establishment flag is stored (step S5002: YES), but the notice execution flag is not stored (step S5003: NO), the notice high probability state in which the general map hold notice is easily performed is set. The configuration. This situation is a case where the notice condition establishment flag is not stored at the start of the special figure game times, but the notice condition establishment flag is stored during the execution of the special figure game times. In such a situation, it is configured to perform a process (a replacement process in the special figure changing middle process) in which a special figure suspension notice is actively performed. And by setting it as such a structure, it is possible to increase the opportunity for the special notice side hold notice. In this case, since the special notice side hold notice is made using the result of the stoppage of the game times, there is a time lag between the special figure side replacement process and the special figure side hold notice. There is. And, for example, when the special figure game hold time is acquired and the special figure side hold information is acquired, the player predicts that the special figure side hold notice will be performed by the acquired hold information. Then, there is a possibility that the launch of the game ball may be stopped from the acquisition until the currently executed special figure game round ends (that is, until the special figure side notice is held or not is confirmed) May stop and wait). Then, it can be said that there is a possibility that the stop will be done by the time difference, and in such a situation, if it is configured to easily generate a hold notice on the normal side, the significance of continuing to launch the game ball It is possible to suppress the above-mentioned stoppage.

  In this embodiment, the special figure hold notice is described as an example of the special figure side effect. However, as the special figure side effect, for example, when reach display is performed, the general figure hold notice is executed. It is good also as a structure made difficult. If the reach display is performed, the degree of attention to the special figure side will increase, so that it is considered that the production effect will not be obtained so much even if the ordinary map holding notice is given. On the other hand, if the reach display is not performed, it is considered to be interested in obtaining the hold information that the reach display is performed, that is, the occurrence of the support state. It is considered a thing. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes the setting of a general-purpose hold notice according to the kind of reach display. For example, it is difficult to execute a general map hold notice if super reach is being performed, and it is easy to execute a general map hold notice if normal reach is being performed or if reach display is not being performed. In addition, presence / absence of re-variation effect, presence / absence of turn effect, ineffective notice effect, etc. may be used for setting a general-purpose hold notice. That is, in the special drawing side production, if the production with a high expectation for the opening / closing execution mode is performed, it becomes difficult to make the general map hold notice, and the production with an expectation for the opening / closing execution mode is lower than that. If it is carried out, making it easier to make a general map hold advance notice, it becomes possible to suitably execute the special drawing side effect according to the degree of attention to the special drawing side effect.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the special effect is executed when the opening / closing execution mode on the special drawing side overlaps with the support state on the normal drawing side. Hereinafter, a configuration for that purpose will be described.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the universal hold control process in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S5101 whether or not a universal hold command has been received. If a universal hold command has been received, a universal hold advance notice setting process is executed in step S5102. The processes in steps S5101 and S5102 are the same as the processes in steps S4501 and S4502. After executing the process of step S5102, the special drawing effect setting process is executed in step S5103. The processing from step S5104 to step S5106 is the same as the processing from step S4503 to step S4505.

  Here, the special drawing effect setting process in step S5103 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S5201, a process of grasping the result of the lottery on the normal map side is executed based on the information of the general map hold command received this time. As described above, in this process, the result of the lottery on the normal map side can be determined by determining the type of the general map hold command. In step S5202, it is determined based on the processing result in step S5201 whether or not the hold information related to the currently received general hold command is a release result. If it is not an opening result, the special figure effect setting process is terminated. If it is a release result, the process advances to step S5203.

  In step S5203, it is determined whether or not the support status based on the hold information related to the currently received general hold command is the high winning support status. When it is determined that the low winning support state is determined instead of the high winning support state, the special figure effect setting process is terminated. If it is in the high winning support state, the process proceeds to step S5204.

  In step S5204, a holding process for holding information on the special figure side is executed. In this process, a process of grasping the hold information stored in each area of the first sub-side hold area 250a or the second sub-side hold area 250b of the hold storage area 250 is performed. In subsequent step S5205, based on the processing result of step S5204, it is determined whether or not any of the holding areas 250a and 250b includes any holding information that results in a jackpot. If any of these results is a normal outage result or a special outage result, the special figure effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5205 that any jackpot result is included, it is determined in step S5206 whether or not it is a jackpot result that becomes a high-frequency winning mode, that is, a 15R probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. It is determined whether or not the hold information becomes. If it is not a jackpot result for the high-frequency winning mode, the special figure effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5206 that the jackpot result is the high-frequency winning mode, the process advances to step S5207 to execute processing for grasping the fluctuation display time of the usual game times. This process is a process for grasping the period until the support status corresponding to the currently acquired common figure hold command is executed. Specifically, the remaining variable display time of the currently executed common figure game times is grasped. At the same time, when the hold information is stored in the sub-side telephone combination hold area 250c, the change display time of each hold information is grasped. This process corresponds to the special figure side process in steps S4902 to S4904. Then, in step S5208, it is determined whether or not the support state corresponding to the currently acquired general-pending hold command overlaps with the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode grasped in step S5104.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the hold information based on the winning to the through gate 35 is stored in the third area of the sub-side electric role holding area 250c, and as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the hold information is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gc3 in the hold display area Gc. The case of affirmative determination in step S5208 is an opening result in which the hold information is in a high winning support state. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. As the hold information displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 in the first hold display area Ga, there is information corresponding to the jackpot result that becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and the opening / closing execution mode and the support state are shown in FIG. This is a case where overlapping periods exist as shown in FIG.

  In this case, after setting the overlapping effect in step S5209, the special figure effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, that is, if there is no period in which the opening / closing execution mode and the support state overlap, the special figure effect setting process is terminated.

  In the overlapping effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), for example, in order to notify that there is an overlapping period in the area overlapping with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the execution of the variation display of the special figure game times, In addition, a character display of “Intense heat” is executed and a sound effect is generated in the speaker unit 64. As a result, the player can grasp that the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode subsequently occurs, and that the support state that becomes the high winning support state occurs during the opening / closing execution mode. Become.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode and the support state are associated with each other to produce an effect. In other words, the opening / closing execution mode and the support state both have an upper limit winning number, and the upper limit of the prize balls obtained is determined in advance. On the other hand, if these occur in duplicate, the player can obtain not only the prize balls obtained in the opening / closing execution mode but also the prize balls including the prize balls obtained in the support state. Therefore, if it is possible to notify that it is a situation where a large number of prize balls can be obtained in such a duplicate, it will be a novel game in the configuration where the special game side and the normal game side are played. Is possible. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, although it was set as the structure which performs duplication production | presentation when opening / closing execution mode and a support state overlap, even if it is a case where it does not overlap, the case where opening / closing execution mode and a support state generate | occur | produce continuously or in a short time When it occurs over a predetermined period, it may be configured to execute overlapping effects.

  In addition, when the support state overlaps a plurality of times during the opening / closing execution mode, it may be configured to produce an effect therefor. That is, the type of overlap effect may be varied depending on the overlap ratio between the opening / closing execution mode and the support state and the number of prize balls obtained. In this case, the more prize balls that can be obtained, the higher the player's expectation can be made when the presentation is more flashy.

  In addition, in the special figure game times, the duplicated effect is executed as an effect unrelated to the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but the special figure is suspended so that the special stoppage is stopped in the special figure reservation notice. It may be configured to change the notice. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes the execution aspect of a common figure reservation notice like the said 1st-3rd embodiment.

  In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode and the support state overlap, the overlapping effect is performed. It is good also as a structure to perform. In the case of the opening / closing execution mode, which is a low-frequency winning mode, the player may be disappointed because a prize ball cannot be obtained in the opening / closing execution mode, even though it was a big hit result. There is. Therefore, if it is configured to notify the overlap with the support state, at least a prize ball according to the support state can be obtained, so the expectation that the subsequent gaming state will shift to the high probability mode is the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to prevent you from erasing the book due to the unfortunate feeling that you cannot get the prize ball.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the winning possibility to the lower working port 34 is notified based on the winning to the through gate 35. Hereinafter, a configuration for that purpose will be described.

  FIG. 77 (a) is a flowchart showing the processing for changing the common map in the present embodiment. As described above, in the normal map change processing, a process for switching the display color of the display portion of the general map display area P at a predetermined cycle is performed. In the present embodiment, not only the display color switching process but also a process for determining a winning to the through gate 35 and a process based thereon are performed.

  That is, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not an ordinary-pending hold command has been received. In this case, as described above, only display color switching in the display section of the general map display area P is performed. If it is determined in step S5301 that the common figure pending command has been received, the changing pending command handling process is executed in step S5302, and the usual figure changing middle process is terminated. In this case, not only the switching of the display color in the display part of the general map display area P but also processing corresponding to the hold command is performed.

  In the changing pending command response processing, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), it is determined in step S5401 whether or not the currently-executed normal game game is a release result. In such a process, it is possible to confirm whether or not the current general figure game round is an open result by grasping the game result information set in the normal figure change start process. If it is a release result, it is determined in step S5402 whether or not the release result grasped in step S5401 is a release result that is in a high winning support state. If a negative determination is made in either step S5401 or step S5402, the changing pending command handling process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5402 that the result is an open result that results in a high winning support state, the process advances to step S5403. In step S5403, a process for grasping the remaining variation display time in the currently-executed ordinary game game is executed. The process of step S5403 can also be referred to as a process of grasping the time (period) until the support state that becomes the high winning support state grasped in step S5402 occurs. In step S5404, a process for grasping the flow time required for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to flow down to the lower operation port 34 is performed. In this process, the required flow time is stored in advance in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243 as a predetermined time (for example, 2 sec), and the flow time is read. The flow time required for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to flow down to the lower working port 34 may vary depending on various types of objects and nails 38 installed in the game area PE. Therefore, the flow-down time may be determined with a certain range (for example, 1.5 sec to 2.5 sec).

  In step S5405, the time until the support state grasped in step S5403 is compared with the flow-down time grasped in step S5404. It is determined whether or not a prize can be awarded to the lower operation port 34 in the support state grasped in (1). In this case, when the support state is executed so as to cross the flow-down time, it is determined that a winning is possible.

  Note that, in the support state, it may be configured that the time between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 34a is grasped, and it is determined that a winning is possible when the time when the open state crosses the flow-down time. In this way, more accurate winning possibility can be determined.

  If it is determined in step S5405 that a winning is possible, a special effect is executed in step S5404, and then the on-change pending command handling process is terminated. If it is determined in step S5405 that a winning is not possible, the process for responding to a pending change command is terminated.

  As a special effect, it may be performed as an effect on the normal drawing side or as an effect on the special drawing side. When performing as an effect on the normal map side, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the background color of the normal map display area P may be changed to be different from the background color so far. In this case, it is good also as a structure which emits a sound effect (Pui!) From the speaker part 64. FIG. Further, when performing as an effect on the special drawing side, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the second hold is used to indicate that the hold information based on winning in the lower working port 34 is easily acquired. A configuration may be adopted in which the holding image is displayed lightly in the empty area of the display area Gb, or the characters “Kamon!” Are displayed while pointing to the empty area. Even in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which sound effects are emitted from the speaker unit 64.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, on the premise of the gauge configuration that allows the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 to win the lower working port 34, based on the acquisition of the hold information on the normal map side, It was set as the structure which alert | reports whether the game ball used as the opportunity of acquisition can win a prize to the lower action | operation opening | mouth 34. As shown in FIG. If it does in this way, it will become possible to perform both effects suitably, correlating the flow-down mode of a game ball, the effect on the usual figure side, and the effect on the special drawing side.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of combinations of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) Although the special figure reservation notice is made using the stop result of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the special figure game times, the special figure hold notice may be made by other effects during the special figure game times. It is good also as a structure performed using the image for a holding | maintenance at the side of a figure. As a configuration to be performed by other effects during the special figure game times, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character appears during the special figure game times and the timing of the start of fluctuation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 perform the special figure hold notice It may be configured to have a timing different from the case where there is not, or may be configured so that the order of the change start of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is different from the case where no special figure reservation notice is performed. In addition, as a configuration to be performed using the special drawing side holding image, a plurality of types of special drawing holding images are stored in advance as in the general drawing holding notice in each of the above embodiments, and the opening / closing execution mode is stored. Different types of holding images may be selected according to the degree of expectation to shift to. By doing so, the execution timing of the special figure hold notice does not have to be at the end of the variable display in the special figure game times. For example, as shown in the second embodiment, the special figure game times side effect ( In the configuration in which the execution mode of the general map hold notice is changed according to the special figure hold notice, the change can be made more diverse.

  Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a special figure hold notice is executed using a special figure hold image, the player predicts that the hold information has high expectation for the opening / closing execution mode when the hold is acquired. can do. In such a configuration, without waiting for the end of the special figure game times being executed as in each of the above embodiments, it is possible to shift to the opening / closing execution mode afterwards by the holding image on the special figure side as described above. If predicted, there is a possibility of stopping the launch of the game ball and waiting for the hold information to be digested, that is, to shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, in such a situation, if it is configured to actively hold the hold notice on the normal side (configuration to set the notice high probability state), it is meaningful to continue the launch of the game ball, stop action Can be prevented in advance.

  In particular, just before the upper limit number (100 times) of the high frequency support mode with a limited number of times, as already described, waiting for the end of the high frequency support mode rather than actively aiming to win the lower working port 34, There is a possibility that a beating action will be performed. In such a situation, it is considered that the probability that the stopping action will be performed is markedly increased if a holding notice with a high expectation for the opening / closing execution mode is performed. Therefore, in such a situation, the holding notice on the normal side is actively executed (with a configuration opposite to that of the first embodiment), so that a prize is awarded to the lower working port 34. It is also possible to suppress the stopping action.

  (2) As a configuration for changing the setting of the general figure hold notice according to the game situation and the production content on the special figure side, the execution probability of the general figure hold notice varies depending on the game situation and the production content on the special figure side. In addition, although the configuration is set to either the low warning probability state or the high prediction probability state, the configuration for changing the setting of the general-purpose hold notification is not limited to this. For example, the execution mode of the general map hold notice may be set differently depending on the game situation and the production content on the special figure side, or the hold information that is the target of the general figure hold notice may be different. .

  As the configuration in which the execution mode of the general map hold notice is different, for example, the type of the special reserve image SPB that can be selected may be different depending on the game situation and the production content on the special map side. It may be changed so that the general map hold advance notice is made according to the fluctuation display pattern in the middle or the stop result, or the general figure hold advance notice is configured so that the general figure hold advance notice is made based on the variable display pattern or stop result of the general figure game times. The variation display pattern and the stop result at the time of execution may differ depending on the game situation and the content of the special figure. However, since the performance on the special drawing side is an auxiliary production on the special drawing side, it is preferable not to be more flashy than the production on the special drawing side, and from the viewpoint of suppressing an increase in processing load. However, it is preferable that the configuration of the general map hold notice itself is a simple configuration as in the above embodiment.

  In addition, for example, depending on the game situation and production contents on the special figure side, the game situation and production contents on the special figure side execute the general figure hold notice depending on the game situation and production contents on the special figure side. In the case of the first state suitable for the situation to be performed (normal gaming state, low frequency support mode, situation without special figure reservation notice), a predetermined area (for example, the first area to the second area) In the second state (the open / close execution mode or In the case of the high frequency support mode and the situation where there is a special figure reservation notice), it is stored in an area (for example, the third area to the fourth area) different from the predetermined area in the sub-side power role reservation area 250c. Hold information And pending notice of the subject. Then, if the predetermined area and an area different from the predetermined area are the areas that are subject to the lottery on the normal side prior to the different area, the first state is better. If the support state that is likely to occur at a timing earlier than the second state is informed, and the special figure side is in the first state and is a situation in which the general-purpose hold notice should be executed, the earlier timing. The possibility of transition of the support state can be notified. In addition, even if the special figure side is in the second state and it is not the situation that the general figure hold notice should be executed, it will shift to the support state at a later timing than that situation. Even if you miss the general map hold notice at the start timing of the hold notice, the special figure hold notice is confirmed by the subsequent change in the situation on the special figure side (change from the second state to the first state) There is also a possibility that.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the timing change process is configured to grasp the game situation on the special figure side at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the current process timing. May be.

  For example, the variable display time (including the variable display time of the currently-executed general game game time) of the stored general map-side hold information is grasped, including the hold information related to the currently acquired general map hold command. In addition, the variable information display time of the hold information on the special figure side (including the remaining variable display time if the special figure game is being executed) and the open / close execution mode are performed (if the special graphic game is currently being executed, the open / close execution is To know the remaining mode). Then, the game state on the special figure side is not changed until the period (the period until the result of the determination of success / failure is informed) from the current processing timing until the holding information related to the currently acquired general-purpose holding command shifts to the support state. It is determined whether or not to migrate. Specifically, for example, during the period from the current processing timing until the hold information related to the hold command acquired this time shifts to the support state, it is determined whether or not the special drawing side shifts to the open / close execution mode. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode ends (whether or not the remaining number of times is a predetermined number (4 times) if the high frequency support mode is limited in number). In these cases, a normal hold image SPA is displayed at the time of receiving the current general-pending hold command, and the special-pending hold is displayed immediately before or simultaneously with the transition after the game state on the special drawing side transitions. Even if the advance notice is made, the reserved image for ordinary drawing is changed to the special reserved image SPB after the situation that does not disturb the special drawing side. As mentioned above, depending on the game state on the special figure side, the player pays attention to the special figure side production, and there is a possibility that the production on the special figure side may be overlooked. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the attention level of the special drawing side will be reduced. Therefore, in the case where the gaming state on the special figure side changes from the acquisition timing of the pending command on the usual figure side until the result of the success / failure lottery related to the pending command is notified, If it is set as the structure which changes the execution timing of this, it will become possible to perform the effect of the usual figure side according to the game state of the special figure side. As a result, the special drawing side production and the normal drawing side production can be performed in a balanced manner.

  (4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball receiving portions of the variable winning device 32 and the lower operation port 34 are provided in the lower region PE4, and the game balls are fired so as to flow down either the left region PE2 or the right region PE3. In addition, although it has been configured to be able to win both the ball entering portions 32, 34, it may be arranged so that each can be divided. That is, for example, one of the ball entering portions 32 and 34 is provided in one of the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, and the other ball entering portions 32 and 34 are provided in the other of the regions PE2 and PE3. In this way, when the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left region PE2, it can enter only the entrance portion provided in the region PE2 on the side, and the game ball flows down the right region PE3. When the ball is fired, it is possible to enter the ball only in the ball entering portion provided in the region PE3 on that side. Or it is good also as a structure which provides one of the entrance parts 32 and 34 in one of both area | regions PE2 and PE3, and provides the other entrance part 32 and 34 in lower area | region PE4 or upper area | region PE1. Since the game balls flowing down the left region PE2 and the right region PE3 can also pass through the upper region PE1 and the lower region PE4, the game PE moves to the regions PE2 and PE3 on the side where the entrance parts 32 and 34 are provided. When the game ball is fired, the game ball can enter the entrance parts 32 and 34, and the entrance part 32 and 34 provided in the upper area PE1 or the lower area PE4 enter the entrance part. On the other hand, if a game ball is fired to the areas PE2 and PE3 on the side where the entrance parts 32 and 34 are not provided, the entrance area 32 and 34 cannot be entered, but the upper area PE1 or lower area It is possible to enter the entrance parts 32 and 34 on the side provided in the side region PE4. In this way, in the configuration in which both the ball entering portions 32 and 34 are arranged so as to be able to be distinguished, if the advance notification is made beforehand that the transition to the support state during the opening / closing execution mode is made, as a player, Not only is it possible to get confused about which one to aim at, but even if you are in the open / close execution mode, overlapping support status can make you feel lost and motivated to play. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement as described above, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience as described above by not informing beforehand that the support state occurs during the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the other hand, in the configuration in which the balls 32 and 34 are arranged as described above, for example, it is possible to create a new game in which the lower operation port 34 is aimed at according to the progress of the opening / closing execution mode. it can. That is, during the waiting time between rounds when the variable winning device 32 is closed during the opening / closing execution mode, if the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the open state, it is notified in advance. Unlike the conventional opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 32 and the lower operation port 34 can be alternately awarded, and a game ball is simply fired toward the variable winning device 32, diversification of the game is possible. Can be planned.

  (5) The OP period and ED period may be set as follows. For example, when the result of the previous ordinary game play is an opening result corresponding to the shift to the support state, the OP period in the next support state is set according to the current ED period. Further, when the result of the next ordinary game game is an opening result corresponding to the shift to the support state, the ED period of the current support state is set according to the next OP period. By doing in this way, it is possible to lengthen or shorten the period when the fluctuation display itself of the usual game times is not performed, and it is possible to suitably perform the production during that period.

  (6) Even if the release results are the same, the OP period and the ED period may be set differently. That is, for example, in the above-described embodiment, in the first release result A1, the OP period is set to a short time and the ED period is set to a short time, but either period may be set to a long time. Also, the presence / absence and type of execution of the OP effect and the ED effect may be set differently. That is, for example, in the first embodiment, in the first release result A1, the OP effect is not performed and the ED effect is not performed, but the effect may be performed in any period. Good.

  (7) In the support state as well as the OP period and the ED period, the standby time (between rounds) during the unit opening / closing control (one round) in which the electric accessory 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state and then closed. The standby time (hereinafter, also referred to as RD period) may be changed. Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the OP period and ED period are changed in the above embodiment, and FIG. 78B is a diagram for explaining how the RD period in this modification is changed. It is explanatory drawing.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the OP from the timing t1 when one game figure game ends is completed to the timing t2 or the timing t3 when the first unit opening / closing control in the support state is started. The length of the period was set to be different depending on the gaming state. On the other hand, the length of the RD period that is the waiting time between the unit opening / closing control and the unit opening / closing control from the timing t4 to the timing t5 varies depending on the opening result (0.2 msec in the high winning support state, low In the winning support state, 2 seconds), it was the same period regardless of the gaming state. In the support state, the length of the ED period from the end of the last unit opening / closing control at the timing of t6 or the timing of t7 until the start of the next general game play time at the timing of t8 depends on the gaming state. It was set differently.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in this modified example, the OP period from the timing t1 when one game figure game ends to the timing t2 when the first unit opening / closing control in the support state is started, The length of the ED period from the timing t7 when the unit opening / closing control is ended to the timing t8 when the next ordinary game play is started is not different. On the other hand, the RD period that is the standby time between the unit opening / closing control and the unit opening / closing control is set to be longer in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode (t3 in the low frequency support mode). (Timing of t6 to t6, and timing of t4 to t5 in the high frequency support mode). By doing in this way, when shifting to a support state during the low frequency support mode, it is possible to secure time for executing an effect (RD effect) for notifying the state between lands during the RD period. As this RD effect, for example, a configuration of displaying characters such as “I will open again!” Is conceivable. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, if such RD effects are frequently performed, it may seem that the player feels bothersome. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the opening / closing control can be performed according to whether or not the RD effect is performed during the RD period and the length of the RD effect.

  (8) The lengths of the OP period, the ED period, and the RD period are not selected from predetermined types, and may be configured to be changeable by lottery using a counter or the like, for example. . Further, the OP period, the ED period, and the RD period may be set by lottery or the like regardless of the game result on the normal side. In this way, it is possible to make the length of each period more diverse. However, a configuration in which each period is uniquely determined as in the above-described embodiment and thereby each period is uniquely determined is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing an increase in processing load.

  (9) The OP period, the ED period, and the RD period are set to be different depending on the game state on the special figure side. However, it is sufficient that these periods can be set differently. It is good also as a structure which is not influenced by the condition.

  (10) The length of the OP period, the ED period, and the RD period, and the number of times of opening in each opening result are not limited to the above. For example, the number of times of opening in each opening result may be set to one, or a structure including four or more times may be included.

  (11) The number of reservations is such that the number of first result display area reservation areas Ra is four, the number of second result display area reservation areas Rb is four, and the number of electric role reservation areas Rc is four. There is no limitation, and there may be three or five or more, and the number of each holding may be different. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which has not only the structure which has the reservation area Ra for 1st result display parts, and the reservation area Rb for 2nd result display parts but other than that, and only one of the reservation areas is reserved. It is good also as a structure to have.

  (12) Although the hold information of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially determined over the hold information of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, the reverse determination may be made. It is good also as a structure which judges the success or failure in order (acquisition order). However, in view of the superiority of the distribution table for the second result display unit, a configuration that preferentially digests the hold information of the distribution table for the second result display unit is preferable.

  (13) Although the special control side and the general drawing side various processes for holding notice are executed in the effect control device 82, they may be executed in the main control device 81. The main controller 81 may be configured to execute the process.

  (14) The mode of the reservation notice on the special map side and the normal map side is merely an example, and may be another mode. For example, the hold notification on the special map side may be configured to use a holding image like the hold notification on the special map side. It is good also as a structure performed using the aspect (stop result) of a display. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs each reservation advance notice using an accessory etc., and it is good also as a structure which uses the display light emission part 63 and the speaker part 64. FIG.

  (15) Based on the winning to the through gate 35, the winning combination lottery on the normal side of whether or not the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is in an open state (support state) is performed. However, the electric accessory 34a is not provided in the lower operation port 34, and may be provided in, for example, another pitching part (general winning port 31 or the like).

  (16) Based on the processing result of the special figure side situation grasping process, the execution mode and processing of the general figure holding notice are different, but based on the processing result of the special figure side situation grasping process, It is only necessary that the process and the production mode on the production are different, and the present invention is not limited to the execution mode and the process on the general map reservation notice.

  (17) Based on the processing result of the situation grasping process on the special figure side, the type of the general figure holding information to be specified for the general figure holding notice may be changed. Specifically, according to the game situation of the special figure side, it is a configuration in which only the hold information that becomes the release result is specified first, or only the hold information that becomes the high winning support state in the release result is specified first. It may be a configuration, or conversely, only a holding information that is a result of losing may be specified first. In this way, the game situation on the special drawing side and the contents of the production on the normal drawing side can be associated with a simple configuration.

  (18) As a general-purpose hold notice, the general-use hold image is made different. However, the player has continued to hold the hold notice since the start of the general-purpose hold notice. Any other aspect may be used as long as it can be recognized. For example, the background color or the image of the display screen G may be different, or the general-purpose hold notice may be continuously performed by an effect execution unit such as another display unit or an accessory.

  (19) When the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, a winning to the lower working port 34 may not be generated at all, and although a winning is generated, the winning is less likely than in the open state. In other words, it is sufficient if the ease of winning a prize to the lower operation port 34 is different at least between the open state and the closed state. Also, the variable winning device 32 may be configured such that no winning in the big winning opening 32a occurs when the variable winning device 32 is closed, or a winning is generated, but it is less likely to win than in the open state. It is acceptable as long as the ease of winning the winning prize opening 32a is different between at least the open state and the closed state.

  (20) The number of remaining times in the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times in the situation grasp processing and timing change processing on the special figure side is grasped (step S4704 and step S4805). However, the configuration shifts to the high-frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure which grasps | ascertains the frequency | count of execution of the special figure game times from. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which counts the elapsed time after transfering to the said high frequency support mode, and grasp | ascertains the remaining frequency | count and execution frequency by the elapsed time.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, it is determined whether to set the notice low probability state or the notice high probability state by each process of the special figure side situation grasping process. It is good also as a structure set up so that it may become.

  (22) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when entering, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  In addition, the invention described in each of the following feature groups is as follows: “In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, when a game ball enters a start ball entering section provided in the game area, Whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a state, etc. is performed, for example, on a display device provided in a gaming machine, the display of the variation of the picture is started, and the above-mentioned stop display of the variation display Regarding the background technology that “a display effect for one game time is displayed in which a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed” (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). However, there is still room for improvement in this respect. ”The present invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

<Feature A group>
Feature A0. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First determination means for performing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first pitching unit (a function for executing the determination process of the main controller 81);
Based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means being a predetermined result, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player (execution of game state transition processing by the main controller 81) Function)
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second entrance portion (through gate 35) that is provided in the game area separately from the first entrance portion and into which a game ball can enter;
An accepting state that is provided in the gaming area and that allows the game ball to be easily received in the first entrance part or the predetermined entrance part, and that the game ball is placed in the first entrance part or the predetermined entrance part than the acceptance state. A non-accepting state that is difficult to accept, and a variable receiving means (electrical accessory 34a) that can be displaced,
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance part (function for executing a general game time control process by the main controller 81);
Based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means being a predetermined specific result, the variable acceptance means is changed from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state, and then the non-acceptance state. Variable control execution means for executing variable acceptance control (function for executing a general game state transition process by the main control device 81);
Information corresponding to a result when the second determination is made at a timing before the second determination by the second determination unit is performed after the game ball enters the second entrance portion. A destination specifying means (a function for executing processing for holding a general map by the main control device 81) for executing processing for specifying
Based on the fact that the specified result by the destination specifying means has become a predetermined special result, a special notification corresponding to the result of the second determination that is the specific target is given to the predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Special notification executing means (function to execute a general map hold notice setting process by the production control device 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine in which the first determination is performed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result, the first ball entry unit or There is provided variable receiving means that influences the ease of entering the game ball into another ball entering part, and this variable receiving means is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entering part. The variable acceptance control is performed according to the result of 2 determination. Therefore, depending on the result of the second determination based on the fact that the second entrance is made and the result of the second determination based on it, the ease of entering the first entrance is different. The advantage will be different. In such a configuration, as a notification about the second determination, a special notification corresponding to the result may be performed at a timing earlier than the second determination. As a result, not only a game such as whether or not a privilege can be obtained based on the entrance to the first entrance part, but also the special ease of entering the first entrance part can be displaced. A game such as prediction by notification can be performed, and the game can be diversified.

Feature A1. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First information acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance part (function for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81);
First information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means;
First determination means for making a first determination as to whether or not the first information stored in the first information storage means corresponds to predetermined first correspondence information (whether or not determination processing by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
With
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state (normal gaming state, low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second gaming state (open / close execution mode, high frequency support) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Mode, high probability mode), and
Based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means being the first correspondence result that the first information to be determined corresponds to the first correspondence information, the gaming state is changed to the first state. A state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for transitioning from the gaming state to the second gaming state;
A game notification operation corresponding to the result of the first determination by the first determination means is started as a notification result corresponding to the result of the first determination by the first determination means. As a single game time control means (main control) for controlling the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the first information stored in the first information storage means. A function of executing the game times control process by the device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second entrance portion (through gate 35) that is provided in the game area separately from the first entrance portion and into which a game ball can enter;
A variable that is provided in the gaming area and is displaceable between an accepting state in which the game ball can be easily received by the first entrance part and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is not easily accepted by the first entrance part. Receiving means (electric appliance 34a);
A second information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for through by the main control device 81) for acquiring second information based on a game ball entering the second pitching section;
Second information storage means (electric role holding area 233) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
Second determination means for making a second determination as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to predetermined second correspondence information (a general game game by the main controller 81) Control processing)
Based on the fact that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second correspondence result that the second information to be judged corresponds to the second correspondence information, the variable receiving means is A variable control execution means (a function for executing a normal game state transition process by the main control device 81) for executing variable acceptance control from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then to the non-acceptance state;
Second determination notification means for performing notification processing for performing the notification on the second determination of the second determination means by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means (general display change display by the effect control device 82) Control process and function to execute the hold hold control process)
With
The second determination notification means includes
For the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, information corresponding to a result of the second determination when the predetermined second information is a target of the second determination A destination specifying means (a function for executing processing for holding a general map by the main control device 81) for executing processing that specifies at a timing earlier than the second information is subject to the second determination;
The second determination when the predetermined second information that is the specific target is the target of the second determination based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined special result Special notification corresponding to the result is performed by the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit (a function for executing the general-purpose hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82),
With
The gaming machine is
Grasping means for grasping the gaming state (function for executing the situation grasping process on the special figure side by the effect control device 82 in the first embodiment);
Based on the grasping result by the grasping means, changing means for changing the execution mode of the notifying process of the second determination notifying means (such as a general figure hold notice setting process or special figure effect setting process by the effect control device 82). Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the first information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first entrance part, and the result of the first determination for the first information is the first correspondence result, the gaming state In the gaming machine that makes a transition to the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, variable receiving means that influences the ease of entering the game ball into the first ball-entry portion is provided, and this variable receiving means is The variable acceptance control is performed according to the result of the second determination performed based on the entrance to the second entrance part. Therefore, depending on the result of the second determination based on the fact that the second entrance is made and the result of the second determination based on it, the ease of entering the first entrance is different. Advantage (transition of gaming state) will be different. In such a configuration, the second determination informing means for informing about the second determination includes a destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to the determination result at a timing earlier than the second determination is performed, Special notification is performed based on the identification result of the previous identification result. Thus, not only a game in which the gaming state is shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the entry to the first entrance part, but also the ease of entering the first entrance part side. It is possible to play a game such as predicting by a special notification that the distance can be displaced, and it is possible to diversify the game.

  And in the said structure, the notification process for alerting | reporting about 2nd determination is included including the special alerting | reporting of the displacement of the ease of entering into such a 1st entrance part earlier than that. The execution mode may differ depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to notify the level of the advantage for the player (whether it is the first gaming state or the second gaming state) while associating the ease of entering the first pitching part that affects the level. It becomes possible. For example, when the gaming state is the first gaming state, it is considered that the player wants to immediately enter the second gaming state, the occurrence of entry into the first entry part, and the entry In order to make it easy to generate | occur | produce, it is thought that interest to the notification of the 2nd determination based on the entrance to the 2nd entrance part and the entrance into a ball rises. If the gaming state is the second gaming state, the player wishes that the second gaming state lasts for a long time, or that the second gaming state occurs again even if the gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state. This is considered to be more concerned with the direct notification on the first determination side than the notification through the entrance to the second entrance portion. Therefore, by appropriately changing the execution mode for notification on the second determination side according to the difference in the gaming state based on the determination result on the first determination side as described above, appropriate notification that matches the player's interest is performed. be able to. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

  Feature A2. Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the changing means is a destination specifying changing means for changing the execution mode of the specifying process by the destination specifying means in the notification process (generally suspended by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising a function of executing a notice setting process.

  According to the said structure, the execution aspect of the process which specifies 2nd information at the timing before 2nd determination is performed can be match | combined with the gaming state of the 1st determination side. As described above, in the gaming state on the first determination side, the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which have different advantages for the player, are set. The degree of attention will be different, and the production contents to be executed are considered to be different. In addition, the processing load on the gaming machine side associated therewith varies depending on the gaming state. On the other hand, not only the first determination but also the second determination is a determination relating to the profit to the player, and if the processing of the second determination itself regarding such profit is made different depending on the gaming state on the first determination side. The player's profits are also different due to the differences, and many changes are required in the specifications of the gaming machine, the management of the game, the design of the gaming machine, and the like. Therefore, if the execution mode of the process specified by the second specifying side specifying means is changed according to the difference in the attention level and the processing load due to the difference in the gaming state, the part related to the profit of the player Only the processing on the production side can be made different without changing, and the degree of attention and the level of processing load on the first determination side can be suitably adjusted on the second determination side. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature A3. The destination specification changing means includes a means for changing whether or not to execute the specified processing by the destination specifying means (function to execute the processing from step S4604 to step S4606 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature A2, which is characterized.

  According to the above configuration, since it is a change as to whether or not the process of specifying the second information is simply performed by the destination specifying means, the effect described in A2 can be achieved with a simple processing configuration.

  Feature A4. The destination specifying changing means includes means for changing the number of the predetermined second information for performing the specifying process by the destination specifying means (function for executing the process of step S4707 by the effect control device 82). A gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3.

  According to the above configuration, the number of second information on the second determination side to be specified by the first specifying means is changed depending on the level of advantage for the player (the game state on the first determination side). The number of pieces of second information with which the person can predict the result on the second determination side is different depending on the advantage of the gaming state. In this way, for example, during the first gaming state that is relatively unfavorable for the player, the number of second information to be specified can be increased to suppress game redundancy, or conversely, the processing load can increase. During the second gaming state, the processing load can be distributed by reducing the number of second information to be specified. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  Feature A5. The changing means is a special notification changing means for changing the execution mode of the special notification by the special notification executing means (steps S4607 to S4607 by the effect control device 82) of the notification processing based on the grasping result of the grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S4611).

  According to the said structure, the execution aspect for the special alerting | reporting which alert | reports 2nd information at the timing before 2nd determination is performed can be match | combined with the gaming state of the 1st determination side. As described above, in the gaming state on the first determination side, the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which have different advantages for the player, are set. The degree of attention will be different, and the production contents to be executed are considered to be different. In addition, the processing load on the gaming machine side associated therewith varies depending on the gaming state.

  On the other hand, not only the first determination but also the second determination is a determination relating to the profit to the player, and if the processing of the second determination itself regarding such profit is made different depending on the gaming state on the first determination side. The player's profits are also different due to the differences, and many changes are required in the specifications of the gaming machine, the management of the game, the design of the gaming machine, and the like. Therefore, if the execution mode of the special notification on the second determination side is changed in accordance with the difference in the attention level and the processing load due to the difference in the gaming state, the portion related to the player's profit is not changed. Only the processing on the production side can be made different, and the degree of attention and the level of processing load on the first determination side can be suitably adjusted on the second determination side. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature A6. The special notification changing unit is configured to change an execution mode of the special notification by the special notification execution unit based on a grasp result of the grasping unit and a specification result of the process to be specified by the destination specifying unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein there is a gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the execution state for special notification for notifying the second information at a timing earlier than the second determination is performed by the gaming state on the first determination side and the destination specifying means on the second determination side. It can be changed in consideration of the specific result. As described above, in the gaming state on the first determination side, the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which have different advantages for the player, are set. The degree of attention will be different, and the production contents to be executed are considered to be different. In addition, the processing load on the gaming machine side associated therewith varies depending on the gaming state.

  On the other hand, not only the first determination but also the second determination is a determination relating to the profit to the player, and if the processing of the second determination itself regarding such profit is made different depending on the gaming state on the first determination side. The player's profits are also different due to the differences, and many changes are required in the specifications of the gaming machine, the management of the game, the design of the gaming machine, and the like. Therefore, if the execution mode of the special notification on the second determination side is changed in accordance with the difference in the attention level and the processing load due to the difference in the gaming state, the portion related to the player's profit is not changed. Only the processing on the production side can be made different, and the degree of attention and the level of processing load on the first determination side can be suitably adjusted on the second determination side.

  In this configuration, since the execution mode of the special notification is changed in consideration of not only the situation on the first determination side but also the situation on the second determination side (specific result by the prior specifying means), the special notification is performed. In changing the execution mode, there is little inconsistency or inconvenience with the situation on the second determination side. That is, for example, in the case of a configuration for changing whether to perform special notification according to the situation on the first determination side, although the special notification should not be executed as the situation on the second determination side, Depending on the situation of the first determination side, it may be executed in reverse, and there may be an event opposite to that. Therefore, if not only the first determination side but also the second determination side is taken into consideration, the execution mode of the special notification can be set satisfactorily.

  Feature A7. The special notification changing means includes means for changing whether or not to execute the special notification by the special notification executing means (function for executing the processing of steps S4604 to S4606 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6.

  According to the above configuration, since it is merely a change as to whether or not the special notification is executed, the effect described in the feature A5 or the feature A6 can be achieved with a simple processing configuration.

  Feature A8. The special notification changing unit includes a timing changing unit (a function of executing a timing changing process by the effect control device 82) for changing the execution timing of the special notification by the special notification executing unit. A gaming machine according to any one of A7.

  According to the above configuration, the special notification execution timing may differ depending on the gaming state. As mentioned above, it is considered that the player's attention level and target (target to be noticed) differ depending on the game state, and if the execution timing of the special notification is set accordingly, the special notification will be more effective. It can be. For example, depending on the gaming state, it is common to set whether or not the game time on the first determination side is performed and when it is not, and the second determination is made according to whether or not such game times are executed. If the execution timing of the special notification on the side is changed, the execution status of the game times and the execution timing of the special notification can be adjusted. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  Feature A9. The timing changing means is configured to change the execution timing so as to execute the special notification after shifting from the current gaming state to another gaming state based on the grasping result by the grasping means. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein there is a gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which the first determination and the second determination are executed in parallel, the effect on the second determination side (special notification) is adjusted according to the situation on the first determination side (game state). can do. That is, depending on the situation (gaming state) on the first determination side, there may be a situation where the special notification should not be executed, and the gaming state on the first determination side shifts to another gaming state as described above ( Specifically, if a special notification is made after the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state or the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state), the special notification is executed in a situation that should not be executed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience.

Feature A10. Based on the acquisition of the second information by the second information acquisition means, the information on the acquired second information is notified by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means, and at least the acquisition is performed. The second stored information notification means (function to execute the general-purpose hold control process by the effect control device 82) that continues to notify the information related to the second information until the second information that has been made becomes the target of the second determination. With
The special notification execution unit sets a notification mode of the special notification from a plurality of types of notification modes (holding images SPA and SPB) determined in advance based on the identification result by the destination specifying unit (effects) A function of executing the processing of step S4604 to step S4606 by the control device 82), and performs the special notification in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means,
The special notification changing unit is a unit for changing the notification mode set by the notification mode setting unit based on the grasp result of the grasping unit (function for executing the processing of steps S4607 to S4611 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A9, comprising:

  According to the said structure, special alerting | reporting is performed by the alerting | reporting of the information regarding the 2nd information used for 2nd determination, the display of what is called hold information, and the alerting | reporting aspect is changed by the change means. And since the display of the hold information is continuously performed at least until the second determination is made, even if the player is not aware when the display of the hold information is changed by the changing means, The possibility of noticing after that is increased. As described above, although the second determination is related to the profit for the player, there is also an auxiliary aspect of the first determination, so if the performance related to the second determination is performed too flashy, There is a possibility that the degree of attention to the 1 determination side is lowered. However, if the effect on the second determination is not noticed, the effect will be lost even if the effect is changed by the changing means or the like. Therefore, if the period during which the special notification is executed is set to be relatively long rather than making the effect at the time of executing the special notification, the first determination side is not disturbed. 2 Special notification on the determination side can be suitably executed.

Feature A11. Variable entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 96) for granting a privilege (prize ball) to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for changing the entry position from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable entry means; ,
With
The second gaming state is a special gaming state in which the variable entry control of the variable entry means is performed by the variable entry control means.
The changing means is for grasping whether the gaming state is the special gaming state by the grasping means and changing the execution mode of the notification processing by the second determination notifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10.

  According to the above configuration, a special game state in which variable entry control of the variable entry means is performed is set as the second game state, and the notification processing by the second determination notification means is performed depending on whether or not the special game state exists. The execution mode is changed. Since a bonus is awarded when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player will have the first determination result as the first corresponding result in the first game state (that is, transition to the special game state). In addition, in the second game state (special game state), attention is paid to whether or not a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. That is, it can be said that the target of the player's attention varies depending on the gaming state. Moreover, in this special game state, not only the production is flashy, but also the local processing load is controlled by variable entry control, control for granting a privilege accompanying entry to the variable entry means, etc. There is concern about the increase. Therefore, if the execution mode of the notification process on the second determination side is changed based on the difference in the game state, the notification process on the second determination side is performed while adjusting the processing load according to the attention target of the player. It is possible to perform such notification on the second determination side satisfactorily. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the privilege granting unit is configured to be able to grant a privilege based on a game ball entering the first pitching unit.

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a privilege is given to the player when the game ball enters the variable pitching means, the privilege can be given based on the entrance to the first entrance part. Therefore, the degree of attention to the entrance of the game ball to the first entrance part that triggers the transition to the special game state is increased, and as a result, the second rate of changing the entrance rate to the first entrance part. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the entry to the entry part, the second determination, and the special notification that notifies the result of the second determination first.

  In addition, the privilege provided based on the entrance to the 1st entrance part may be a privilege different from the privilege provided based on the entrance to the variable entrance means, It is good also as a structure which provides a privilege.

Feature A13. The game apparatus includes launch operation means (launch handle 54) for performing the predetermined launch operation by a player, and the game ball launching means is positioned according to an operation amount of the predetermined launch operation performed on the launch operation means. The game ball is fired so that the game ball reaches
In the game area, on the flow down path from the first position (the left area PE2 or the right area PE3) where the game ball reaches when the predetermined operation of the first operation amount is performed on the emission operation means. The game machine according to Feature A11 or Feature A12, wherein both the first entrance portion and the variable entrance means are provided.

  According to the said structure, a game ball can be made to enter a 1st entrance part aiming at a variable entrance means, or a variable entrance means, aiming at a 1st entrance part. Thereby, even in a special game state in which variable entry control is performed (even when the launch operation means is operated aiming at the variable entry means), the entry to the first entry portion In the special gaming state, it is meaningful to change the execution mode of the process for the notification on the second determination side regarding the entrance rate to the first entrance part. For example, if it is configured not to notify that there is a high possibility that the entrance rate to the first entrance part will increase in the special notification, it is possible to concentrate on entering the variable entry means during the special game state. On the contrary, if it is configured to notify that there is a high possibility that the entrance rate to the first entrance part is increased in the special notification, the entrance to the first entrance part occurs during the special game state. It becomes possible for the player to grasp that it becomes easy, and it is possible to predict and entertain that the benefits obtained during the special gaming state will increase.

  Feature A14. The changing means is means for changing the execution mode of the notification process in accordance with the execution timing of the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means (function for executing special figure effect setting processing by the effect control device 82). A gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A13.

  According to the above configuration, since the execution mode of the notification process is changed in accordance with the execution timing of the variable entry control, the variable entry control in the variable entry means and the variable acceptance control in the variable acceptance means overlap. If notification on the second determination side is set in accordance with the situation, such as when it is not necessary, it is possible to make the notification mode more in accordance with the player's interest. For example, if it is likely that a ball entering the first ball-in part is likely to occur at the timing when the variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the player will be notified of the result of the second determination first as a special notification. Therefore, it can be predicted that the benefits obtained during the special gaming state will increase, and the willingness to play can be increased. On the other hand, if the variable entrance means is in an open state, the entrance to the first entrance is likely to occur (only one can enter), and no special notification is made. Then, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play the game by notifying the content that may cause a disadvantage to the player.

Feature A15. As execution modes of the variable acceptance control by the variable control execution means, there are a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode. Is set,
As the gaming state, the first gaming state is set as the first mode, and the second gaming state is set as the second mode, according to any one of the features A1 to A14, Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the difference in gaming state (mode) such as whether the second mode in which the entrance rate to the first entrance part is increased in the variable acceptance control or the first mode in which the entrance rate is lower than that. It is grasped and the execution mode of the notification process on the second determination side is changed. That is, the second determination is to determine whether to change the entrance rate to the first entrance part (whether or not the variable receiving means is in the second state). As to whether or not the ball rate changes, the player's interest greatly varies depending on whether the first mode has a low pitch rate or the second mode has a low pitch rate. So, if you know which of these modes you are staying in and change the execution mode of the notification for whether or not the entrance rate to the first entrance part changes, for example, When there is not much necessity for notification, it is possible not to perform notification, or to perform notification at a timing as necessary, and to improve the effectiveness of notification on the second determination side. it can.

Feature A16. The state transition means is configured to shift the gaming state from the second mode to the first mode by performing the first determination over a predetermined number of times in the second mode. (High frequency support mode with limited number of times)
The changing means is means for changing the execution mode of the notification process based on the number of times of the first determination executed or executable in the second mode (the processes of steps S4704 and S4705 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature A15, further comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the second mode continues for a predetermined number of times of the first determination, and depending on the number of times during the second mode, the player wants to enter the first pitching part. If there is, you may not want to enter. In other words, the necessity for special notification varies greatly depending on the number of times in the second mode, and if the execution mode of the notification process for that is changed as in the above configuration, the processing in accordance with the necessity for special notification can be performed. it can. Therefore, the degree of attention of the special notification itself can be increased, and unnecessary processing is not performed, so that the processing configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Note that “based on the number of times of the first determination executed or executable in the second mode” means “the number of times of the first determination executed or executable in the second mode is predetermined. It can be rephrased as “on the basis of having reached the specified number”.

  Further, in addition to the first entrance part, other entrance parts for obtaining the first information that is the trigger for the first determination are provided. If the above configuration is applied to a configuration in which the information acquired based on the entry into the sphere is a predetermined determination target, the number of determinations based on the entry into the other entry is also the second mode. It is preferable to have a configuration that is reflected in the number of continuations.

Feature A17. The first information storage means can store the first information with a predetermined number (four) being a plurality of predetermined numbers as an upper limit,
The first determination means sequentially executes the first determination for each first information when a plurality of the first information is stored in the first information storage means.
The changing means changes the execution mode of the notification process based on the fact that the number of times of the first determination that can be executed in the second mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number. A gaming machine according to A16.

  According to the above configuration, based on the fact that the number of remaining first determinations in the second mode is equal to or less than the upper limit number (predetermined number) that can be stored in the first information storage unit, The execution mode of the process is changed. For example, in a gaming machine having a so-called pre-read notification function for notifying the result of the first determination at a timing earlier than each game time as notification on the first determination side, the first determination as described above is performed. If the number of remaining times is a little and the first determination result is informed that the result of the first determination is the first response result, the transition to the second gaming state has already been confirmed. The need to enter a game ball into the first entrance may be reduced. Then, in such a situation that the second mode remains, the necessity for performing the second determination based on the entrance to the second entrance part as well as the first entrance part is reduced. In that case, as a player, there is a possibility of stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching means. If game ball launches are stopped in such a situation, it will be difficult for game hall managers to distinguish from cheating that adjusts the timing of game ball launches and makes it easier to obtain benefits. There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to detect fraudulent acts. On the other hand, if it is informed that the variable receiving means can be in the second state by the special notification on the second determination side, for example, a privilege such as a prize ball is given by entering the first entrance part. If it exists, even if it is in the above situations, it is meaningful that at least the game ball is introduced into the first entry part, and it is considered that the player continues to emit the game ball.

  Therefore, for example, until then, the second determination side special notification is not performed or the frequency of the special notification is reduced, and if the second mode as described above becomes a slight situation, the second determination side special notification is performed. If the execution mode of the notification process is changed so that the notification is performed or the frequency of the special notification is increased, the occurrence of the inconvenience at the mode boundary as described above can be suppressed.

Feature A18. The second determination notification means does not perform the special notification in the second mode or lowers the frequency of execution of the special notification, and performs the special notification in the first mode or performs the special notification. The frequency is higher than in the second mode,
The changing means performs the special notification or the special notification based on the fact that the number of times of the first determination that can be executed in the second mode is equal to or less than the predetermined number even in the second mode. The game machine according to Feature A17, wherein the execution mode of the notification process is changed so that the execution frequency of the notification is higher than the previous execution frequency.

  According to the said structure, the effect of characteristic A17 can be show | played suitably.

Feature A19. A third entrance part (upper operating port 33) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A third information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81) for acquiring third information based on a game ball entering the third ball entry section;
Third information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the third information acquired by the third information acquisition means;
Third determination means for performing third determination as to whether or not the third information stored in the third information storage means corresponds to predetermined third correspondence information (whether or not determination processing by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
In a situation where information corresponding to the first information storage unit and the third information storage unit is stored, each determination unit is controlled so that the first determination is prioritized over the third determination. Priority means (function of executing a winning process for the operation port by the main control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the situation where the first information and the third information are stored, the priority is determined by the priority unit with the first information prioritized. Therefore, for the player, the first information is considered more important than the third information. In such a configuration, variable receiving means is provided on the first incoming ball portion side, and the variable receiving means switches to the second state in which the game ball can be easily received based on the incoming ball to the second incoming ball portion. The second determination notification means notifies the second determination. Then, for example, if the special notification execution means of the second determination notification means informs in advance that the variable receiving means will be in the receiving state, it will enter the first entrance section or the third entrance section. Rather than waiting for the ball to be generated, it would be desirable to make a so-called stop-off that switches the launch / stop of the game ball so as to enter the first ball entry portion in accordance with the content of the special notification that was notified in advance. It is done. Therefore, in such a configuration, if the configuration of the feature A1 is applied, it is possible to suitably suppress the above-described stop hitting.

  In particular, if the present configuration is applied to the feature A15, the following effects can also be achieved.

  That is, the first mode (first gaming state) and the second mode (second gaming state) are set as the gaming state. In the second mode, the variable receiving means is likely to be in the receiving state. It is set to be less likely to enter the acceptance state. For this reason, in the first mode, there is a possibility that the above-described stopping is repeated so that the first information is acquired as much as possible instead of the third information. However, if such a stoppage is made, it becomes difficult for game hall managers and the like to discriminate from cheating that makes it easier to obtain benefits by adjusting the timing of game ball launch, resulting in fraud There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to discover the act.

  Therefore, the execution mode of the notification process by the second determination notification unit is changed depending on the game state (mode), for example, the special notification is not executed during the first mode, or the execution frequency is set lower than that in the second mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the above-described stop-off from being performed.

  Feature A20. The characteristic determination A19 is characterized in that the first determination and the third determination are set so that it is more advantageous for the player to perform the first determination than to perform the third determination. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first information is prioritized by the priority unit in a situation where the first information and the third information are stored, the first determination is more gaming than the third determination. Is set to be advantageous to the user. Therefore, it is considered that the player wants to enter the game ball into the first entrance part so that the first determination is performed as much as possible. In such a configuration, variable receiving means is provided on the first incoming ball portion side, and the variable receiving means switches to the second state in which the game ball can be easily received based on the incoming ball to the second incoming ball portion. The second determination notification means notifies the second determination. Then, for example, if the special notification execution means of the second determination notification means informs in advance that the variable receiving means will be in the receiving state, it will enter the first entrance section or the third entrance section. Rather than waiting for the ball to be generated, it would be desirable to make a so-called stop-off that switches the launch / stop of the game ball so as to enter the first ball entry portion in accordance with the content of the special notification that was notified in advance. It is done.

  In particular, the first mode (first gaming state) and the second mode (second gaming state) are set as the gaming state. In the second mode, the variable receiving means is likely to be in the receiving state. It is set to be less likely to enter the acceptance state. For this reason, in the first mode, there is a possibility that the above-described stopping is repeated so that the first information is acquired as much as possible instead of the third information. However, if such a stoppage is made, it becomes difficult for game hall managers and the like to discriminate from cheating that makes it easier to obtain benefits by adjusting the timing of game ball launch, resulting in fraud There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to discover the act.

  Therefore, the execution mode of the notification process by the second determination notification unit is changed depending on the game state (mode), for example, the special notification is not executed during the first mode, or the execution frequency is set lower than that in the second mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the above-described stop-off from being performed.

Feature A21. Variable entry means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 96) for granting a privilege (prize ball) to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for changing the entry position from the closed state to the open state and then closing the variable entry means; ,
With
As the gaming state, a special gaming state in which the variable entry control of the variable entry means is performed by the variable entry control means is set,
As execution modes of the variable acceptance control by the variable control execution means, there are a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode. Is set,
The gaming machine according to Feature A19 or Feature A20, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be set to the first mode during the special gaming state and set to the second mode after the special gaming state ends.

  According to the above configuration, since the first mode is set during the special gaming state, it is difficult for the first entering part to enter the ball, and the second mode can be set after the special gaming state ends. As described above, the first mode is not easily acquired because the first mode is set during the special gaming state, but the first information is easily acquired if the second mode is set after the special gaming state ends. In such a configuration, it is considered that a player who wants to actively acquire the first information after the end of the special game state refers to a special notification that can be used as an index for the probability of entering the first entry part. . In this case, for example, if it is found by special notification that the variable receiving means can be in the second state after a predetermined period from the end of the special gaming state, the player may want to stop the game ball from being fired until then. . However, the inconvenience of performing such stoppage is as described above, and if such a situation is grasped and the execution mode of the notification process on the second determination side can be changed, such a situation will occur. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience in advance.

Feature A22. In the gaming area, the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are arranged so that game balls that enter the second entrance portion can enter the first entrance portion. And
Any one of the features A1 to A21, wherein the destination specifying means is configured to be able to execute the specifying process based on a game ball entering the second ball entry unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the said structure, the relationship between a 2nd entrance part and a 1st entrance part can be improved more. And if the process which specifies ahead based on the entrance to the 2nd entrance part is performed, it will be judged whether it will enter into the 1st entrance part after that, ie, it will be in an acceptance state. be able to. That is, it is possible to notify whether or not it is easy for the game ball to enter the first entrance when the game ball enters the second entrance. Thereby, diversification of a game can be achieved.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First information acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first entrance part (function for executing a winning process for the operating port by the main control device 81);
First information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means;
First determination means for making a first determination as to whether or not the first information stored in the first information storage means corresponds to predetermined first correspondence information (whether or not determination processing by the main control device 81) Function to execute)
With
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state (normal gaming state, low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second gaming state (open / close execution mode, high frequency support) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Mode, high probability mode), and
Based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means being the first correspondence result that the first information to be determined corresponds to the first correspondence information, the gaming state is changed to the first state. A state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for transitioning from the gaming state to the second gaming state;
First determination notification means (game control by the effect control device 82) for executing a first notification process for performing notification on the first determination of the first determination means by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). Processing function), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second entrance portion (through gate 35) that is provided in the game area separately from the first entrance portion and into which a game ball can enter;
A variable that is provided in the gaming area and is displaceable between an accepting state in which the game ball can be easily received by the first entrance part and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is not easily accepted by the first entrance part. Receiving means (electric appliance 34a);
A second information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for through by the main control device 81) for acquiring second information based on a game ball entering the second pitching section;
Second information storage means (electric role holding area 233) for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means;
Second determination means for making a second determination as to whether or not the second information stored in the second information storage means corresponds to predetermined second correspondence information (a general game game by the main controller 81) Control processing)
Based on the fact that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second correspondence result that the second information to be judged corresponds to the second correspondence information, the variable receiving means is A variable control execution means (a function for executing a normal game state transition process by the main control device 81) for executing variable acceptance control from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then to the non-acceptance state;
Second determination notification means for executing a second notification process for performing notification on the second determination of the second determination means by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means (the usual control by the effect control device 82) A function to execute a variable display control process and a general map hold control process), and
With
The second determination notification means includes
For the predetermined second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, information corresponding to a result of the second determination when the predetermined second information is a target of the second determination 2nd destination specifying means (function for executing processing for holding a general map by the main control device 81) for executing processing that specifies at a timing earlier than the second information is subject to the second determination;
The second in the case where the predetermined second information that is the specific target is the target of the second determination based on the specific result by the second destination specifying means being a predetermined special result Second special notification executing means for executing a second special notification corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means (function for executing a general-purpose hold notice setting process by the effect control device 82) )When,
With
The gaming machine is
Grasping means for grasping the status of the first notification processing by the first determination notifying means (function for executing the situation grasping process on the special figure side by the effect control device 82 in the second and third embodiments);
Based on the grasping result by the grasping means, changing means for changing the execution mode of the second notifying process of the second determination notifying means (general drawing hold notice setting process or special figure effect setting process by the effect control device 82) Etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the first information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first entrance part, and the result of the first determination for the first information is the first correspondence result, the gaming state In the gaming machine that makes a transition to the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player, variable receiving means that influences the ease of entering the game ball into the first ball-entry portion is provided, and this variable receiving means is The variable acceptance control is performed according to the result of the second determination performed based on the entrance to the second entrance part. Therefore, depending on the result of the second determination based on the fact that the second entrance is made and the result of the second determination based on it, the ease of entering the first entrance is different. Advantage (transition of gaming state) will be different. In such a configuration, the second determination informing means for informing about the second determination includes a destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to the determination result at a timing earlier than the second determination is performed, Special notification is performed based on the identification result of the previous identification result. Thus, not only a game in which the gaming state is shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the entry to the first entrance part, but also the ease of entering the first entrance part side. It is possible to play a game such as predicting by a special notification that the distance can be displaced, and it is possible to diversify the game.

  And in the said structure, the notification process for alerting | reporting about 2nd determination is included including the special alerting | reporting of the displacement of the ease of entering into such a 1st entrance part earlier than that. May be different depending on the situation of the first notification process on the first determination side. Since the status of the first notification process depends on the level of advantage for the player (whether it is the first game state or the second game state), the player is considered highly interested. It is done. For example, since the player will be bored if the first determination side notification process on the first determination side is not performed, it is considered that at least the notification on the second determination side should be notified if possible. It is done. Also, for example, when the progress of the first notification process is slow (for example, the length of the game time as the first determination effect is long), it may be felt redundant by some players. In contrast, when the progress is slow (the length of the game is long), there is a possibility that a flashy effect that can change the game state is performed as an effect on the first notification processing side Is high, and it is thought that they are very interested in the production. Therefore, by making the execution mode for notification on the second determination side different depending on the progress status of the first notification processing, appropriate notification according to the player's interest can be performed. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

In addition, as described in the feature A group, “change the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification unit”
A configuration of “changing the execution mode of the process specified by the second destination specifying unit” is conceivable. In this case,
A configuration of “changing whether or not to execute the specified process by the second destination specifying unit”;
A configuration of “changing the number of the predetermined second information for performing the specifying process by the destination specifying unit” is conceivable.

In addition, “changing the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification unit” means that as described in the feature group A,
A configuration of “changing the execution mode of the second special notification by the second special notification execution unit” is also conceivable. In this case,
A configuration of “changing whether to execute the second special notification by the second special notification execution unit”;
A configuration in which the execution timing of the second special notification by the special notification execution unit is changed is conceivable.

  By applying the above configuration, it is possible to achieve individual effects described in the feature A group.

Feature B2. The first determination notifying means starts the game turning operation by the predetermined notifying means, and ends the game turning operation as a notification result corresponding to the result of the first determination by the first determining means. As one game time, a process for controlling the predetermined notification means is performed so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the first information stored in the first information storage means. Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing by the main controller 81),
The game time control means includes an operation period setting means (function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting an operation period of the game turn operation, and is set by the operation period setting means. The game replay operation is performed over the operation period,
The changing means is a game times corresponding means for changing the execution mode of the notification processing of the second determination notification means according to the operation period (holding advance notice setting processing by the effect control device 82 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to Feature B1, further comprising:

  According to the above-described configuration, the process for the game turning operation is performed as the first notification process. If the operation period of the game times is long, some players may feel that it is redundant. Conversely, when the operation period is long, it is flashy that the game state can shift as an effect on the game times side. There is a high possibility that the production is performed, and it is considered that the production is highly interested. On the other hand, if the operation period of the game times is short, it is considered that the first determination is frequently performed. Therefore, the first information should be frequently acquired. Then, in such a case where the operation period of the game times is short, it is considered that the interest in the notification for the second determination regarding the variable acceptance control is reduced, and such notification is frequently performed. The player may feel annoying. Therefore, if the execution mode of the notification process of the second determination notification unit is changed according to the operation period of the game times, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the player's interest. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature B3. A pre-operation period in which the information on the operation period set by the operation period setting unit is specified at a timing earlier than the game time to be set by the operation period setting unit is executed by the game time control unit. Specific means (function to execute the process of step S4903 by the production control device 82),
The game times response means changes the execution mode of the second notification process of the second determination notification means according to the information of the operation period specified by the previous operation period specification means. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, which is characterized.

  According to the said structure, the length of an operation | movement period can be grasped | ascertained before the game time about a 1st determination is performed. The second notification processing by the second determination notification means includes special notification processing related to the second determination destination identification, and the second determination side prior notification (so-called pre-reading notice) is first determined. The relationship between both determinations can be enhanced by adjusting to the length of the previous game round on the side.

  Feature B4. The game times responding means has a predetermined operation period of the game times operation that is executed at a timing when the second determination is performed on the second information to be specified by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the game machine is changed so that the second special notification is easily performed based on a period equal to or longer than the period.

  According to the above configuration, when it is known in advance that the game time on the first determination side is long in advance, for example, as a player, the launch of the game ball is stopped and the game time is digested. It is also conceivable to wait (perform so-called stopping). However, if such a stoppage is made, it becomes difficult for game hall managers and the like to discriminate from cheating that makes it easier to obtain benefits by adjusting the timing of game ball launch, resulting in fraud There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to discover the act.

  Therefore, in such a situation, if the execution mode of the notification process on the second determination side is changed, for example, if special notification is facilitated, the significance of continuing the launch can be generated. It is possible to deter the stoppage.

Feature B5. The first determination notification means includes:
For the predetermined first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, information corresponding to a result of the first determination when the predetermined first information is a target of the first determination First information specifying means for executing processing for specifying information at a timing earlier than the first determination target (specifying processing for holding a special figure by the main control device 81, processing for setting a special drawing holding command) Function to execute)
The first case where the predetermined first information that is the specific target is the target of the first determination based on the specific result obtained by the first destination specifying unit being a predetermined special result First special notification execution means for executing a first special notification corresponding to the result of the determination by the predetermined notification means or a separate notification means (function for executing the special figure hold notice control process by the effect control device 82) )When,
With
The changing means is a first destination specifying means for changing an execution mode of the second notification processing based on a processing result of at least one of the first destination specifying means and the first special notification executing means ( The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, further comprising a function for executing a general-purpose hold notice setting process according to the third embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, as the first notification process, a process for the first special notification (so-called pre-reading notice) that notifies the result of the first determination first is performed. For example, in a situation in which the player predicts that the game state is likely to shift by the first special notification, the game state shifts rather than having the game ball enter the first pitching part as a player. Until then, he would like to enjoy the production and make a so-called stop to stop the launch of the game ball. However, if such a stoppage is made, it becomes difficult for game hall managers and the like to discriminate from cheating that makes it easier to obtain benefits by adjusting the timing of game ball launch, resulting in fraud There is an inconvenience that it becomes difficult to discover the act.

  Therefore, based on the processing result for the first special notification (the processing result of at least one of the first destination specifying means and the first special notification executing means), the execution mode of the second notification processing on the second determination side is changed. Thus, for example, if it is not notified that the situation is likely to become an acceptance state, the significance of continuing to launch the game ball can be generated, and the above stopping action can be suppressed in advance. .

  Feature B6. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein the first destination specific response unit changes an execution mode of the second notification process according to the ease of execution of the first special notification. .

  Since the first special notification is for predicting the result of the first determination, it is considered that the player is highly interested. Therefore, if the second determination side effect is changed according to the ease of execution of the first special notification as in the above-described configuration, the second determination side effect is associated with the level of interest on the first determination side. It is possible to pay attention to both judgments in a balanced manner.

  Feature B7. The first destination specific response unit is configured to change the first special notification so that it is difficult to execute the second special notification when the first special notification is executed or is easily executed. A gaming machine according to Feature B6.

  According to the said structure, the attention degree with respect to the production | presentation of a 1st determination side can be raised suitably, without distributing concentration of the player interested in 1st special alerting | reporting to the 2nd special alerting | reporting side.

Feature B8. The first special notification is performed at a predetermined timing before the first determination is made after the predetermined first information is acquired by the first information acquisition means (at the end of the game time variation display). It is done in
The second special notification may be continuously performed after the predetermined second information is acquired by the second information acquisition unit until at least the second determination target is the second determination target. The gaming machine according to any one of B5 to B7.

  According to the above configuration, even if the performance on the second special notification side is less conspicuous than the performance on the first special notification side, the player is performing it because the period of execution is long. It is easy to notice. As described above, since the second determination has an auxiliary role of the first determination, the player is relatively interested in the performance on the first determination side. For this reason, even when the second determination side effect is performed, it is necessary to consider that attention to the first determination side effect is not dispersed. For such a reason, the balance between the effects of the first determination and the second determination can be kept good by using the above configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second entrance part (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable receiving means (electrically-operated accessory 34a) that can be displaced between an accepting state in which a game ball can be easily received in the first entrance part and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted in the first entrance part than in the received state )When,
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance part (function for executing a general game time control process by the main controller 81);
Variable control execution means (a function for executing an accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing variable reception control for changing the variable reception means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changing to the non-acceptance state;
On the basis of the result of the second determination by the second determination means becoming the second correspondence result, the acceptance state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to the special state (support state) in which the variable acceptance control is performed. A function to execute a normal game state transition process), and
First period setting means for setting the variable acceptance means in the non-acceptance state in the special state as a first period (function for executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2105 by the main control device 81);
Second period setting means for setting a period during which the variable receiving means is in the non-accepting state in the special state as a second period that is different from the first period (steps S2007 and S2107 by the main controller 81). Function to execute processing)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the second determination is performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit, and if the result is the second corresponding result, the ball enters the first ball entry unit. Transition to a special state that affects ease. In such a configuration, the period during which the variable receiving means in the special state is in the non-accepting state may be set to the first period, or may be set to a second period different from the first period. There is also. In this way, it is possible to produce effects according to the set period.

Feature C2. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second entrance part (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable receiving means (electrically-operated accessory 34a) that can be displaced between an accepting state in which a game ball can be easily received in the first entrance part and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted in the first entrance part than in the received state )When,
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance part (function for executing a general game time control process by the main controller 81);
Variable control execution means (a function for executing an accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing unit variable reception control for changing the variable reception means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changing to the non-acceptance state;
On the basis of the result of the second determination by the second determination means being the second corresponding result, the acceptance state transition means (main state) for transitioning to the special state (support state) in which the unit variable acceptance control is performed at least once. A function of executing a normal game state transition process by the control device 81);
A first period setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2105 by the main control device 81) that sets a waiting period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed in the special state as a first period; ,
Second period setting means for setting a standby period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed in the special state as a second period that is a period different from the first period (step S2007 by the main controller 81, The function of executing the process of step S2107),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the second determination is performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit, and if the result is the second corresponding result, the ball enters the first ball entry unit. Transition to a special state that affects ease. In such a configuration, the standby period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed may be set to the first period, or may be set to a second period different from the first period. In this way, it is possible to produce effects according to the set period.

Feature C3. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second entrance part (through gate 35) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable receiving means (electrically-operated accessory 34a) that can be displaced between an accepting state in which a game ball can be easily received in the first entrance part and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted in the first entrance part than in the received state )When,
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance part (function for executing a general game time control process by the main controller 81);
Variable control execution means (a function for executing an accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing unit variable reception control for changing the variable reception means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changing to the non-acceptance state;
On the basis of the result of the second determination by the second determination means being the second corresponding result, the acceptance state transition means (main state) for transitioning to the special state (support state) in which the unit variable acceptance control is performed at least once. A function of executing a normal game state transition process by the control device 81);
In the special state, effect execution means (a function for executing the support state processing by the effect control device 82) that executes a stand-by effect (opening effect or ending effect) in a waiting period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed. )When,
First period setting means for setting the standby period as a first period (function for executing the processing of steps S2005 and S2105 by the main control device 81);
Second period setting means for setting the standby period as a second period which is a period different from the first period (function for executing the processes of steps S2007 and S2107 by the main control device 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the second determination is performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit, and if the result is the second corresponding result, the ball enters the first ball entry unit. Transition to a special state that affects ease. In such a configuration, the standby effect is performed in the standby period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed. And this waiting period may be set to the 1st period, and may be set to the 2nd period different from the 1st period. If it does in this way, it will become possible to perform standby production according to the set period.

Feature C4. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First determination means for performing a first determination based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry portion (function for executing a determination process of main controller 81);
With
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state (normal gaming state, low frequency support mode, low probability mode) and a second gaming state (open / close execution mode, high frequency support) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Mode, high probability mode), and
Based on the result of the first determination by the first determination means being the first correspondence result, game state transition means (main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. A gaming machine equipped with a function to execute a gaming state transition process by
A second entrance portion (through gate 35) that is provided in the game area separately from the first entrance portion and into which a game ball can enter;
An accepting state that is provided in the game area and that is easy to accept a game ball into the first entrance part or a predetermined entrance part, and a non-acceptance state that is less likely to accept the game ball into the first entrance part than the acceptance state. , Variable receiving means (electrical accessory 34a) that can be displaced,
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance part (function for executing a general game time control process by the main controller 81);
Variable control execution means (a function for executing an accessory opening / closing process by the main control device 81) for executing unit variable reception control for changing the variable reception means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changing to the non-acceptance state;
On the basis of the result of the second determination by the second determination means being the second corresponding result, the acceptance state transition means (main state) for transitioning to the special state (support state) in which the unit variable acceptance control is performed at least once. A function of executing a normal game state transition process by the control device 81);
In the special state, effect execution means (a function for executing the support state processing by the effect control device 82) that executes a stand-by effect (opening effect or ending effect) in a waiting period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed. )When,
According to the gaming state, a first period setting means for setting the waiting period as a first period (a function for executing the processes of steps S2005 and S2105 by the main control device 81);
Second period setting means for setting the waiting period as a second period that is different from the first period in accordance with the gaming state (function of executing steps S2007 and S2107 by the main controller 81) )When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the result of the first determination performed based on the game ball entering the first ball entering part is the first corresponding result, the game state is advantageous for the player in the second game state. In the gaming machine that shifts to the above, there is provided variable receiving means that influences the ease of entering the game ball into the first ball entering part or the predetermined ball entering part. Variable acceptance control is performed based on the result of the second determination performed based on the ball entering the club. For this reason, the ease of entering the first entrance portion may vary depending on whether the entrance to the second entrance portion is performed and the result of the second determination based on the entry, and accordingly, the player The advantage for will be different. Therefore, as a player, it is considered that the player will be interested in entering the second entrance that can trigger the entrance to the first entrance, and the result of the second determination based on it. As a result, you should also be interested in the special situation that moves. In particular, in this special state, it may be desired to make preparations before the unit variable acceptance control is performed, and to enjoy the finish after that. For this reason, it is considered that there is a high interest in the standby effect performed during the standby period.

  On the other hand, the second determination has an auxiliary role of the first determination, and the interest of the second determination can be high or low depending on the gaming state as a result of the first determination. it is conceivable that. Then, for example, there may be a state where the standby effect during the standby period should be entertained as described above, or a state where it is not so, and if the standby period is set according to the gaming state as described above, it is suitable for them. It becomes possible to cope with. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be preferably increased.

  Feature C5. The second period setting means sets a period longer than the first period as the second period based on the gaming state being the first gaming state. A gaming machine according to C4.

  In a state unfavorable for the player (first game state), interest in the result of the second determination side will be high so that the first determination is performed as much as possible, and conversely, a state advantageous for the player (first state) In the (2 gaming state), it is considered that the result on the first determination side is more worrisome than the result of one second determination. Therefore, according to the above configuration, since the waiting time is set longer in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, the period during which the effect (standby effect) is performed is longer in the first gaming state. Can be secured. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably perform the standby effect in the first gaming state.

Feature C6. The standby effect is set according to the gaming state,
Each said period setting means sets each said period according to the said standby production, The game machine as described in the characteristic C4 or the characteristic C5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the above configuration, the standby period can be set according to the standby effect. A general gaming machine includes a first control device that controls variable receiving means in a special state in which unit variable reception control and the like including a waiting period are performed, and a second control device that performs effects therefor. The second control device is controlled based on a signal (command or the like) from the first control device side to produce an effect. For this reason, the standby effect is generally configured on the second control device side in accordance with the standby period set on the first control device side. In this case, since the setting of the standby effect on the second control device side depends on the setting of the standby period on the first control device side, it is necessary to associate each setting with a separate control device. On the other hand, in the above configuration, since the standby period is set according to the standby effect, the setting method is completely reversed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to relate each setting with one control apparatus, and it can aim at reduction of control load.

Feature C7. A first control device (main control device 81) having at least the second determination means, the variable control execution means, and the acceptance state transition means;
A second control device (production control device 82) having the production execution means;
With
Each said period setting means is what the said 1st control apparatus has, The game machine of the characteristics C6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the said structure, it becomes possible to show | play the effect of the said characteristic C6 by a structure completely different from the existing structure.

  Feature C8. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7, wherein the standby effect starts during the special state and ends during the special state.

  According to the above configuration, the standby effect can be completed in one special state without straddling the next second determination effect or special state. If the last standby effect in the special state is configured to straddle the next second determination effect, the player is confused as to whether or not the result of the next second determination has been notified. There is a risk of doing. Therefore, if the above configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Feature C9. The second response result includes a first special response result (for example, the first release result A1) and a second special response result (for example, the first release result) in which the control mode of the variable acceptance control is the same in the special state. A3) is set,
Each of the period setting means is configured to be able to set a corresponding period so that the waiting period is different between the first special response result and the second special response result. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8.

  According to the above configuration, the standby period can be made different in a special state in which variable acceptance control of the same control mode is performed. In this way, even when the same variable acceptance control is performed, the standby period, that is, the period during which the standby effect is performed can be varied, and the standby effect can be diversified.

Feature C10. Each of the period setting means sets a corresponding period according to the gaming state,
The second determination means is set such that, of the second correspondence results, the probability of the first special correspondence result and the probability of the second special correspondence result differ depending on the gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature C9, characterized by:

  According to the above configuration, the probabilities of the special response results only have to be changed according to the respective gaming states, so that the effect of the feature C9 can be achieved with a simple configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means (launching handle 54) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the launched game ball A ball path (rail portions 51, 52) for guiding the player to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game parts arranged in the game area, and a predetermined passage part (general winning prize) of the game parts. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through the mouth 31 or the like.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Upper operation port, 34 ... Lower operation port, 34a ... Electric accessory, 41 ... Symbol display apparatus, 43 ... Main display part, 44 ... Display part for accessory, 54 ... Launch handle, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... production control device, 96 ... payout device, 202 ... MPU, 242 ... MPU, PE ... gaming area, PE1 ... upper area, PE2 ... left area, PE3 ... right area, PE4 ... lower area.

Claims (7)

Game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first pitching portion provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a gaming ball;
First determination means for performing a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first entrance part;
With
In the gaming state, at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are set,
Gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means being a first correspondence result;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A second entrance part that is provided separately from the first entrance part in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
An accepting state that is provided in the gaming area and is easy to accept a game ball in the first entrance part or a predetermined entrance part, and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted in the first entrance part than the accepting state. Variable receiving means displaceable to
A second determination means for performing a second determination based on a game ball entering the second pitching section;
Variable control execution means for executing unit variable acceptance control for changing the variable acceptance means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changing to the non-acceptance state;
An acceptance state transition means for transitioning to a special state in which the unit variable acceptance control is performed at least once based on a result of the second determination by the second determination means being a second correspondence result;
In the special state, an effect executing means for executing a standby effect in a standby period before or after the unit variable acceptance control is performed,
First period setting means for setting the waiting period as a first period according to the gaming state;
A second period setting means for setting the waiting period as a second period, which is a period different from the first period, according to the gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   The second period setting means sets a period longer than the first period as the second period based on the gaming state being the first gaming state. Item 1. A gaming machine according to Item 1. The standby effect is set according to the gaming state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein each period setting unit sets each period according to the standby effect. A first control device having at least the second determination means, the variable control execution means, and the acceptance state transition means;
A second control device having the effect execution means;
With
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein each of the period setting means is included in the first control device. In the second correspondence result, a first special correspondence result and a second special correspondence result in which the control mode of the variable acceptance control in the special state is the same control mode are set,
Each of the period setting means is configured to be able to set a corresponding period so that the waiting period is different between the first special response result and the second special response result. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4. Each of the period setting means sets a corresponding period according to the gaming state,
The second determination means is set such that, of the second correspondence results, the probability of the first special correspondence result and the probability of the second special correspondence result differ depending on the gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein: Game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a predetermined launch operation;
A first pitching portion provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a gaming ball;
A second pitching portion provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a gaming ball;
Variable receiving means displaceable between an accepting state in which a game ball can be easily received into the first entrance part and a non-accepting state in which the game ball is less likely to be accepted into the first entrance part than the accepting state;
A second determination means for performing a second determination based on a game ball entering the second pitching section;
Variable control execution means for executing variable acceptance control for changing the variable acceptance means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state and then changing to the non-acceptance state;
An acceptance state transition means for transitioning to a special state in which the variable acceptance control is performed based on a result of the second determination by the second determination means being a second correspondence result;
First period setting means for setting a period during which the variable receiving means is in the non-accepting state in the special state as a first period;
Second period setting means for setting a period during which the variable acceptance means is in the non-acceptance state in the special state as a second period that is different from the first period;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images